﻿<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><Search><pages Count="226"><page Index="1"><![CDATA[2026 Yamaha Boat

                                                   AR250 / SX250


                              252S / 252SE / 252SD











                                OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL























                                                                              U.S.A. Edition



                               Read this manual carefully                      LIT-18626-15-83
                         before operating this boat.                              F7F-F8199-11]]></page><page Index="2"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 1  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM




















                                              WARNING:
                                                                             Operating, servicing
                                         and maintaining a recreational marine
                                         vessel can expose you to chemicals
                                         including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
                                         phthalates, and lead, which are known to
                                         the State of California to cause cancer and
                                         birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
                                         minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
                                         service your vessel in a well-ventilated area
                                         and wear gloves or wash your hands
                                         frequently when servicing this vessel.
                                         For more information go to
                                         www.P65warnings.ca.gov/marine

























                        Read this manual carefully before operating this boat. This manual should stay
                        with the boat if it is sold.]]></page><page Index="3"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 2  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM






                        IMPORTANT PRODUCT INFORMATION

                        The United States Export Control
                        You will recognize that the Product is manufactured in the United States. Therefore, you may
                        not use, export or reexport the Product except as authorized by the United States laws and
                        the laws of the jurisdiction(s) in which the Product was obtained.
                        The Product is subject to the United States export control laws. In particular, but without lim-
                        itation, the Product may not be exported or reexported, whether directly or indirectly:
                        (a) into any U.S. embargoes or economic sanctioned countries or;
                        (b) to anyone on the U.S. Denied Persons List or Entity List or;
                        (c) to anyone on the U.S. Specially Designated Nationals List,
                        Specially Designated Terrorists List or Specially Designated Narcotic Traffickers List.]]></page><page Index="4"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 1  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Important manual information

                                  To the owner
                        Thank you for choosing a Yamaha boat. This
                        owner’s/operator’s manual contains informa-
                        tion you will need for proper operation, main-
                        tenance, and care. A thorough understanding
                        of these simple instructions will help you to
                        obtain maximum enjoyment from your new
                        Yamaha. If you have any questions about the
                        operation or maintenance of  your boat,
                        please consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        In this manual, information of particular im-
                        portance  is distinguished in the following
                        ways:

                            This is the safety alert symbol. It is used
                        to alert you to potential personal injury haz-
                        ards. Obey all safety messages that follow
                        this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
                             WARNING
                        A WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-
                        tion which, if not avoided, could result in
                        death or serious injury.

                         NOTICE
                        A NOTICE  indicates special precautions
                        that must be taken to avoid damage to the
                        boat or other property.

                        TIP:
                        A TIP provides key information to make pro-
                        cedures easier or clearer.

                        Because Yamaha has a policy of continuing
                        product improvement, this product may not
                        be exactly as described in this owner’s/oper-
                        ator’s manual. Specifications are subject to
                        change without notice.
                        This manual should be considered a perma-
                        nent part of this boat and should remain with
                        it even if the boat is subsequently sold.]]></page><page Index="5"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 2  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                    Important manual information

                                               Use of your engine data
                        This is a brief summary of how Yamaha (Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd., and Yamaha Motor Corpo-
                        ration, U.S.A.) uses your engine data. For more details, please review our Privacy Policy.
                        https://yamaha-motor.com/privacy-policy

                        What engine data we collect? and How we collect your engine data?
                        This boat collects three types of engine data through integrated Engine Control Units (ECU).:
                        (1) Hull Identification Number (HIN); (2) live data showing the performance of the boat such as
                        engine/motor operating state, boat speed, mileage; and (3) other data showing the status of
                        the boat such as diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
                        The collected data will be uploaded to server at Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. by attaching a special
                        Yamaha diagnostic tool to the boat, only when maintenance checks or service procedures are
                        performed.

                        How will we use your engine data?
                        Yamaha use collected data from your boat, (1) to conduct adequate maintenance service in-
                        cluding diagnostics, (2) to implement proper warranty claim judgement, (3) to conduct re-
                        search and development of boat, (4) to provide and improve quality of products, features, and
                        services, (5) to ensure our business purpose, and (6) to comply with requirements of laws and
                        regulations.

                        How we disclose your engine data?
                        We may make your engine data available with: (i) our subsidiaries, affiliates, and business part-
                        ners; (ii) dealers in your country or region, and (iii) contractors within the scope necessary to
                        achieve the purpose of use described above.

                        How long will we retain your engine data?
                        We will retain your engine data for the shortest period of time possible/the time necessary to
                        achieve the above listed purposes.

                        How to contact us?
                        Any questions or complaints regarding the processing of your engine data can be submitted
                        in writing to:
                        Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                        Attn: Privacy Office
                        6555 Katella Avenue Cypress, California 90630-5101]]></page><page Index="6"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 3  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Important manual information

                        The SOLE PURPOSE of above provided contact information is TO RESPOND DATA
                        PROCESSING INQUIRY AND OTHER KINDS OF INQUIRIES WILL NOT BE RESPONDED.
                        Please provide the following information for the proper handling of your inquiry: (1) Your
                        Name; (2) Your Email Address; (3) Your Country of Residence; and (4) Your HIN. We will
                        use your personal information provided only for the purpose of supporting your data process-
                        ing inquiry.]]></page><page Index="7"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 4  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                    Important manual information

                        FCC Compliance                        RF Exposure Compliance
                        This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  This equipment complies with FCC radiation
                        Rules. Operation is subject to the following  exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
                        two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  environment  and meets the FCC  radio  fre-
                        harmful interference, and (2) this device must  quency (RF)  Exposure Guidelines as this
                        accept  any interference received, including  equipment has very low levels of RF energy.
                        interference that may cause undesired oper-
                        ation.
                                                                         AR250 / SX250
                        This equipment has been tested and found to
                                                                      252S / 252SE / 252SD
                        comply with the limits for a Class B digital de-  OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL
                        vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.  ©2026 by Yamaha Motor Corporation,
                        These limits are designed to provide reason-         U.S.A.
                        able protection against harmful interference  1st Edition, May 2025
                                                                       All rights reserved.
                        in a residential installation. This equipment
                                                                Any reprinting or unauthorized use
                        generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-  without the written permission of
                        quency energy and may cause harmful inter-  Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                        ference to radio communications if not       is expressly prohibited.
                        installed and used in accordance with the in-   Printed in U.S.A.
                                                                       P/N LIT-18626-15-83
                        structions.  However, there  is no guarantee
                        that interference will not occur in a particular
                        installation. If  this equipment does  cause
                        harmful interference to radio or television re-
                        ception, which can be determined by turning
                        the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
                        aged to try to correct the interference by one
                        of the following measures:
                         Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
                         Increase the separation between  the
                          equipment and the receiver.
                         Connect the equipment into an outlet that
                          is on a different circuit from the GPS de-
                          vice.
                         Consult the dealer  or an  experienced  ra-
                          dio/TV technician for help.

                        FCC CAUTION
                        Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
                        proved by the party responsible for compli-
                        ance  could void the  user’s authority  to
                        operate the equipment.]]></page><page Index="8"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 1  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Table of contents

                        General and important labels...........1  Control function operation............. 39
                          Identification number records..........1  Boat control functions ................... 39
                            Primary Identification (PRI-ID)      Engine shut-off switch................ 39
                             number.......................................1  Batteries and battery switches ... 39
                            Hull Identification Number (HIN) ...1  Main switches
                            Engine serial numbers...................1  (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)........... 41
                          Emission control information ...........2  Main switch (252SE / 252SD) ..... 41
                            Approval labels of emission          “START/STOP” buttons
                             control certificate .......................2  (252SE / 252SD) ...................... 41
                            Manufactured date labels .............4  Remote control levers................. 42
                            Star labels (4-star models) ............4  Steering ...................................... 44
                          Important labels ...............................6  Tilt lever ...................................... 45
                                                               DRiVE X mode (252SD).................. 45
                            Warning labels ..............................8
                            Other labels.................................12  Forward....................................... 46
                                                                 Reverse....................................... 46
                                                                 Sideways movement .................. 46
                        Safety information.............................13
                                                                 Dock hold ................................... 47
                          Limitations on who may operate
                                                                 Pivot turn .................................... 47
                            the boat.......................................13  High mode .................................. 48
                          Cruising limitations.........................14  Sideways movement
                          Operational requirements ..............15  calibration ................................ 48
                          Required equipment.......................16
                                                              Instrument operation ....................... 50
                          Additional equipment
                                                               Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ..... 50
                            recommendations .......................17
                                                                 Switch panel ............................... 51
                          Hazard information.........................17
                                                               Multi-function display unit
                          Boat characteristics .......................18
                                                                 operation..................................... 51
                          Night operation ..............................19
                                                                 Touching the multi-function
                          Wakeboarding and water-skiing ....19
                                                                   display ..................................... 51
                          Rules of the road............................20  Using the joystick ....................... 51
                          Seating locations............................25  Operation buttons.......................... 53
                          To get more boating safety             Controller.................................... 53
                            information ..................................26  Operating the boat at a steady
                                                                   speed (cruise assist) ................ 53
                          Enjoy your boat responsibly...........26
                                                                 Operating the boat with a
                                                                   minimal wake
                        Description.........................................27  (no-wake mode)....................... 54
                          Boat glossary .................................27  Operating the boat in reverse
                          Location of main components .......28    with more thrust
                                                                   (reverse RPM control) .............. 54
                            Exterior components...................28
                            Seats & interior components.......30  Multi-function display elements..... 56
                            Stern components ......................33  Static bar .................................... 57
                            Helm components.......................34  Center display............................. 58
                            Engine components ....................37  Screen tab bar ............................ 58
                                                                 Status indicator bar .................... 59
                                                               Home screen ................................. 60]]></page><page Index="9"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 2  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                          Map screen ....................................60  Operating the boat in reverse
                            Waypoint.....................................61  with more thrust
                            Track ...........................................61  (reverse RPM control) .............. 80
                            Map settings screen....................62  Multi-function display elements..... 81
                          Trip screen .....................................64  Screen tab bar ............................ 82
                          Media screen..................................65  Status indicator bar .................... 83
                                                                 Operation mode.......................... 84
                            Radio screen (AM/FM) ................66
                            Weather screen...........................66  Home screen ................................. 85
                            Bluetooth screen.........................67  Map screen.................................... 85
                            Auxiliary screen...........................67  Waypoint..................................... 86
                            Zone control screen....................68  Track........................................... 86
                          System control screen ...................68  Map settings screen ................... 87
                          Setting screen ................................69  Trip screen..................................... 89
                            Time setting screen.....................69  Drive control screen....................... 90
                            Depth alarm setting screen.........69  Media screen ................................. 91
                            Unit setting screen......................70  Radio screen (AM/FM)................ 92
                            Brightness setting screen ...........70  Weather screen........................... 93
                            Maintenance setting screen........70  Bluetooth screen ........................ 93
                            Language setting screen.............71  Auxiliary screen........................... 93
                            Tuner Region setting screen .......71  Zone control screen.................... 94
                            Auto Volume setting screen........71  System control screen................... 94
                            Factory reset screen ...................71  Setting screen................................ 95
                          Warnings ........................................72
                                                                 Time setting screen .................... 96
                            Check engine warning ................73  Depth alarm setting screen......... 96
                            Low oil pressure warning............73  Unit setting screen...................... 96
                            Over temperature warning ..........73  Brightness setting screen........... 96
                            House/Start Battery voltage          Maintenance setting screen ....... 97
                             warning ....................................74  Language setting screen ............ 97
                            Communication error warning ....74   Tuner Region setting screen....... 97
                            Low fuel level warning.................74  Auto Volume setting screen........ 97
                            Depth warning.............................74  DRiVE X setting screen
                          Helm controls (except for AR250 /
                                                                   (252SD) .................................... 98
                            SX250).........................................75  Factory reset screen................... 98
                            Switch panel ...............................76  Warnings........................................ 99
                          Multi-function display unit            Check engine warning .............. 100
                            operation.....................................77  Low oil pressure warning.......... 100
                            Touching the multi-function          Over temperature warning........ 100
                             display......................................77  Low/High voltage warning........ 101
                            Using the joystick........................77  Communication error
                          Operation buttons ..........................78  warning .................................. 101
                                                                 Low fuel level warning .............. 101
                            Controller ....................................78
                            Operating the boat at a steady       Depth warning .......................... 101
                             speed (cruise assist) ................78
                            Operating the boat with a         Equipment operation...................... 102
                             minimal wake                      Seats............................................ 102
                             (no-wake mode) .......................79  Driver’s seat.............................. 103
                                                                 Passenger’s seat ...................... 104]]></page><page Index="10"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 3  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Table of contents

                            Engine hood seat ......................104  Collapsing and setting up the
                            Swim platform seat                     wakeboard tower
                             (252S / 252SE / 252SD) .........105   (252SE / 252SD) .................... 127
                            Underwater seats (252S /           Bimini top
                             252SE / 252SD)......................105  (AR250 / 252S).......................... 128
                          Engine hood.................................106
                                                                 Setting up the bimini top .......... 128
                          Storage compartments ................107  Storing the bimini top ............... 130
                            Anchor storage compartment...107     Trailering with the bimini top .... 131
                            Front underseat storage              Removing the bimini top........... 131
                             compartments........................107  Installing the bimini top............. 131
                            Ski locker ..................................108  Bimini top (252SE / 252SD) ......... 132
                            Rear underseat storage               Removing the bimini top........... 132
                             compartment (starboard) .......108  Installing the bimini top............. 132
                            Rear underseat storage             Bimini top (SX250) ....................... 133
                             compartment (port) ................109  Setting up the bimini top .......... 133
                            Enclosed head compartment....109     Storing the bimini top in the
                            Driver’s side console                  upright position...................... 134
                             compartment..........................110  Storing the bimini top in the
                            Stowable table ..........................111  fully collapsed position.......... 134
                            Glove compartment ..................112  Trailering with the bimini top .... 135
                            Galley storage compartment           Removing the bimini top........... 135
                             (except for AR250 / SX250) ...112   Installing the bimini top............. 135
                            Wet storage compartment ........113
                            Stern storage compartments ....114
                          Walk-through ...............................115  Operation and handling
                                                              requirements................................... 136
                            Front walk-through....................115
                            Rear walk-through ....................115  Fuel requirement.......................... 136
                          Windshield....................................115  Fuel ........................................... 136
                          Anchor light (AR250) ....................116  Engine oil requirement................. 137
                          Anchor light                           Engine oil .................................. 137
                                                               Draining the bilge water............... 140
                            (252S / 252SE / 252SD) ............116
                                                                 Draining the bilge water on
                          Anchor light (SX250).....................117
                                                                   land........................................ 140
                          Bow ladder...................................119
                                                                 Draining the bilge water on
                          Swim platform..............................120  water...................................... 141
                            Stern ladder ..............................120
                            Swim platform shower (252S /      First-time operation ....................... 143
                             252SE / 252SD)......................121  Engine break-in............................ 143
                            Remote control keypad.............123
                            Side table ..................................123
                            Accessory outlet .......................124  Pre-operation checks................... 144
                          USB chargers...............................124  Pre-operation checklist............. 144
                          Wireless charger ..........................125  Pre-operation check points ......... 145
                          Wakeboard tower                        Pre-launch checks.................... 145
                                                                 Steering system checks ........... 145
                            (except for SX250).....................125
                                                                 Remote control lever checks.... 145
                            Collapsing and setting up the        Throttle/shift paddle checks
                             wakeboard tower                       (252SD) .................................. 146
                             (AR250 / 252S).......................126]]></page><page Index="11"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 4  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                            Fire extinguisher check.............147  Lifting........................................ 173
                            Access port cap check .............148
                            Jet intake checks ......................148  Care and storage .......................... 174
                            Fuel system checks ..................149  Post-operation care..................... 174
                            Engine oil level check................149
                            Battery check............................150  Flushing the cooling system..... 174
                            Bilge water check......................150  Cleaning the boat ..................... 175
                            Drain plug check .......................150  Basic stain guide ...................... 177
                            Blower checks...........................151  Chil Cool Technology vinyl
                            Navigation and anchor lights           upholstery Cleaning & Care... 178
                             checks....................................152  Battery care .............................. 178
                            Horn check................................153  Long-term storage....................... 179
                            Engine shut-off cords                Fuel system............................... 179
                             (lanyards) check.....................154  Lubrication................................ 179
                            Post-launch checks ..................154  Grease points ........................... 179
                            Engine shut-off switch check....155
                            Cooling water pilot outlet        Maintenance.................................. 182
                             check .....................................155  Maintenance ................................ 182
                            Fuel level check ........................156
                                                                 Owner’s/operator’s manual ...... 182
                                                                 Removing and installing the
                        Operation .......................................157  engine covers ........................ 182
                          Driving your boat..........................157  Periodic maintenance chart...... 184
                            Getting to know your boat ........157
                            Learning to operate your          Specifications ................................. 187
                             boat........................................157  Specifications (1800 cc engine
                            Starting the engines..................157  models) ..................................... 187
                            Stopping the engines................161
                            Leaving a dock..........................161  Specifications (1900 cc engine
                            Turning the boat........................162  models) ..................................... 190
                            Boating with passengers ..........163
                            Stopping the boat .....................164  Trouble recovery............................. 193
                            Boarding from the water ...........164  Troubleshooting........................... 193
                            Boarding from the bow .............165
                            Boarding from a dock or              Troubleshooting chart............... 193
                             landing jetty............................165  Emergency procedures ............... 196
                            Docking.....................................165  Jet pump clean-out
                            Beaching ...................................166  procedure .............................. 196
                            Anchoring..................................167  Raising the shift gates
                            Crossing wakes and swells.......167    (252SE) .................................. 198
                          Post-operation checks.................168  Power steering system will not
                                                                   operate (252SD)..................... 199
                                                                 Jump-starting ........................... 200
                        Trailering ........................................170
                                                                 Fuse replacement ..................... 201
                          Trailering the boat ........................170  Running on one engine............. 204
                            Hitch..........................................170  Towing the boat........................ 204
                            Trailering checklist ....................170
                            Backing your trailer ...................171  Consumer information................... 205
                            Launching .................................172  Limited warranty .......................... 205
                            Loading .....................................172]]></page><page Index="12"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 5  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Table of contents

                          YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                            (Y.E.S.) ......................................207
                          Sample float plan .........................208

                        Index .................................................209]]></page><page Index="13"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 1  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                         Identification number records        Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        Record your Primary  Identification (PRI-ID)  The HIN is stamped into the right rear corner
                        number, Hull Identification Number (HIN), and  of the hull.
                        engine serial numbers in the spaces provided
                        to assist you in ordering spare  parts  from
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer. Also, record and
                        keep these ID numbers in a separate place in
                        case your boat is stolen.
                                                                                          1
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                        The PRI-ID number is stamped on a label at-
                        tached inside the engine compartment. (See  YAMC
                        page 106 for engine hood opening and clos-
                        ing procedures.)                      1  Hull Identification Number (HIN)

                                                              Engine serial numbers
                                                              The engine serial numbers are stamped on a
                                                              label attached to each engine unit. (See page
                                                              106  for engine  hood opening and  closing
                                                              procedures.)
                              1                               1800 cc engine models




                                                                              1
                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number








                                                              1  Engine serial number

                                           PRI-I.D.
                          MODEL
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                          ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A. WITH FOREIGN & DOMESTIC
                          COMPONENTS.
                          ASSEMBLÉ EN U.S. AVEC DES COMPOSANTS ÉTRANGERS ET
                          DOMESTIQUES.







                                                                                                1]]></page><page Index="14"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 2  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels

                        1900 cc engine models                  Emission control information
                                                              These engines conform to U.S. Environmen-
                                                              tal Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California
                                                              Air Resources Board (CARB) regulations for
                         1
                                                              marine SI engines applicable at the time of
                                                              manufacture.
                                                              The 4-star labels are affixed to models that
                                                              meet the  Air Resources  Board’s emission
                                                              standards for 4-star models. (See page 4 for
                                                              information on the star labels.)
                                                              Star labels are not affixed to 3-star models.
                        1  Engine serial number               These engines are certified to operate on reg-
                                                              ular unleaded gasoline.
                        Port side
                                                              Approval labels of emission control
                                                              certificate
                                                              These labels are attached to each engine unit
                           YAMAHA                             and to the inside of the engine compartment.
                                                              (See page 106 for engine hood opening and
                                                              closing procedures and page 182 for engine
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.              cover removal and installation procedures.)
                          MADE IN JAPAN                       1800 cc engine models
                          PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON
                                                                              1





                        Starboard side




                           YAMAHA                             1  Emission control information label




                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                          MADE IN JAPAN
                          PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON








                        2]]></page><page Index="15"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 3  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                        1900 cc engine models                 3-star models

                                                              EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION
                                                              THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                                                              ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                                                              ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS.
                                                              ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:        liters  MAX POWER:             kW
                                                              EPA FEL: HC+NOx             ,CO             g/kW-hr
                                                              EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                                                              YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                         1                                    4-star models
                                                              EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION  TWC/HO25/MFI/OBD/EECS
                                                              THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                                                              FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                                                              SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING
                                                              CERTIFIED COMPONENTS. MEETS        MY CALIFORNIA EVAP EMISSIONS.
                                                              REGULATIONS FOR SPARK-IGNITION MARINE WATERCRAFT.
                                                              ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:            liters  MAX POWER:                 kW
                                                              EPA FEL: HC+NOx                  ,CO             g/kW-h CA FEL: HC+NOx                                     g/kW-hr
                        1  Emission control information label  EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                                                              ARB EVAP FAMILY:  ARB EVAP EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM:
                                                              YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                        3-star models
                          EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                          THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO           MY U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI
                          MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                          SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                          ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                     liters MAX POWER :                         kW
                          EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-hr
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                        4-star models
                          EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                          THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          MY CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST
                          REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
                          MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                          ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                 liters MAX POWER :                    kW
                          EPA  FEL : HC+NOx                  , CO                 g/kW-hr  CA  FEL : HC+NOx                                     g/kW-hr
                          YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.









                                                       1

                        1  Emission control information label










                                                                                                3]]></page><page Index="16"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 4  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Manufactured date labels              Star labels (4-star models)
                        These labels are attached to each engine  This boat is labeled with a California Air Re-
                        unit. (See page 106 for engine hood opening  sources Board (CARB) star label. See below
                        and closing procedures and page 182 for en-  for a description of your particular label.
                        gine cover removal  and installation  proce-
                        dures.)
                                                                           1
                        1800 cc engine models
                                                  1









                                                              1  Star label location


                        1  Manufactured date label
                                                                         1
                        1900 cc engine models





                         1


                                                              1  Star label location

                                                              One Star - Low Emission
                                                              The one-star label identifies engines that
                        1  Manufactured date label
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2001
                                                              exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              ing these standards have 75% lower emis-
                                                              sions than conventional carbureted two-
                                                              stroke engines. These engines are equivalent
                                                              to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for marine
                                                              engines.







                        4]]></page><page Index="17"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 5  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                                                              Three Stars - Ultra Low Emission
                                                              The three-star label identifies engines that
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008
                                                              exhaust emission standards or the Sterndrive
                                                              and Inboard marine engine 2003-2008 ex-
                                                              haust emission standards. Engines meeting
                                                              these standards have 65% lower emissions
                                                              than One Star-Low Emission engines.



                        Two Stars - Very Low Emission
                        The two-star label identifies  engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2004
                        exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                        ing these standards have 20% lower emis-
                        sions than One Star-Low Emission engines.



                                                              Four Stars - Super Ultra Low Emission
                                                              The four-star label  identifies engines  that
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s  Sterndrive
                                                              and Inboard marine  engine 2009  exhaust
                                                              emission standards. Personal Watercraft and
                                                              Outboard marine engines may also comply
                                                              with these standards. Engines meeting these
                                                              standards have 90% lower emissions than
                                                              One Star-Low Emission engines.




















                                                                                                5]]></page><page Index="18"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 6  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels

                                                   Important labels
                        Read the following labels before operating this boat. If you need any additional information,
                        contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer.







                                   12



                                    11



                                                                                       13







                                                11       18

                          3-star models
                                                      14                               15
                                                 11





                            19
                                                                                          18
                          4-star models

                                             19
                                                                              11











                        6]]></page><page Index="19"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 7  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels




                               6


                                                                             16    1
                                                                       4










                                                          5                       2
                                                                          3










                                     7          10                                 7














                                                                                   7
                                        7
                                            8                                9
                                                      17









                                                                                                7]]></page><page Index="20"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 8  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Warning labels
                        If any of these labels is damaged or missing, contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer for a replacement.
                           1

























                           2
















                           3








                                                              F3A-U415P-20




                        8]]></page><page Index="21"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 9  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels


                           4












                           5









                           6


                               Visibility from the seated position at this helm
                                     station is limited.
                             Operation from a standing position may be necessary.
                               Avoid serious injury or death from collisions.
                                Maintain a lookout as required by USCG
                                     Navigation Rules.
                                    Read owners manual.

                           7
























                                                                                                9]]></page><page Index="22"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 10  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels


                          8













                                                                    F3A-U415R-40
                          9













                          10





                                                                A
                                                                 B


                            Check cap – if handle is not parallel to centerline of boat or a strong pull will
                            move cap, it is not locked securely and could be forced out by water pressure.
                                                                                          F6D-U411D-00
                          11                                   12















                        10]]></page><page Index="23"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 11  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                      General and important labels


                           13







                                                          F1C-U416B-20

                           14
                           Except for SX250











                           15






                                                          20



























                                                                                               11]]></page><page Index="24"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 12  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Other labels

                           16

                           MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
                             12    PERSONS OR 2200   LBS.

                                2600 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR
                           THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY
                           STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION
                           MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS
                           MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING USA, INC.
                           MODEL:                   VONORE, TN
                            DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.
                            MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.


                           17                                 18

















                           19
                            All applicable electrical system components installed as
                            original equipment meet appropriate U.S.C.G. requirements
                            for ignition protection. (Ref. 33 CFR 183.410 and 183.440)
                             YAMAHA                    60E-83627-00















                        12]]></page><page Index="25"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 13  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                                  Limitations on who may
                        The safe use and operation of this boat is    operate the boat
                        dependent upon the use of proper operat-   Yamaha recommends a minimum operator
                        ing techniques, as well as upon the com-  age of 16 years old.
                        mon sense, good judgment, and expertise  Adults must supervise use by minors.
                        of the operator. Every operator should  Know the operator age and training re-
                        know the following  requirements  before  quirements for your state. A boating safety
                        operating the boat.                    course is recommended  and may be  re-
                         Before operating the boat, read the own-  quired in your state. You can find local rules
                          er’s/operator’s manual,  the Operation  In-  by contacting the United States Coast
                          struction card, and all labels on the boat.  Guard (USCG), the National Association of
                          These materials should give you an under-  State Boating Law Administrators, or your
                          standing of the boat and its operation.  local Power Squadron.
                         Never allow anyone to  operate this boat   This boat is designed to carry the operator,
                          until they too have read this owner’s/oper-  up to 11 passengers, and cargo. Never ex-
                          ator’s manual, the Operation Instruction  ceed the maximum load limit or allow more
                          card, and all labels.                than 12 persons (or 11 persons if a wake-
                                                               boarder or water-skier is being pulled) to
                                                               ride in the boat at any time. Weight distri-
                                                               bution affects performance. Keep weight in
                                                               the boat low and evenly distributed from
                                                               side-to-side  and bow-to-stern. Remove
                                                               any unnecessary cargo and store it on
                                                               shore.

                                                                Maximum load:
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)
















                                                                                               13]]></page><page Index="26"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 14  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                               Cruising limitations            This is a high-performance boat—not a toy.
                         Scan  constantly for people, objects,  and  Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves
                          other watercraft. Be alert for conditions  can increase the risk of back/spinal injury
                          that limit your visibility or block your vision  (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs,
                          of others.                           ankles, and other  bones. Do not jump
                                                               wakes or waves.
                                                               Do not  operate  the boat  in rough water,
                                                               bad weather, or when visibility is poor; this
                                                               may lead to an accident causing injury or
                                                               death. Be alert to the possibility of adverse
                                                               weather. Take note of  weather  forecasts
                                                               and the prevailing weather conditions be-
                                                               fore setting out in your boat.
                                                               Never operate in water that is less than
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and  90 cm (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the
                          keep a safe distance from people, objects,  boat, otherwise you increase your chance
                          and other watercraft.                of hitting a submerged object, which could
                         Do not follow directly behind other water-  result in injury.
                          craft.
                         Do not go near others to spray or splash
                          them with water.
                         Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
                          make it hard for others to avoid you or un-
                          derstand where you are going.                    90 cm (3 ft)
                         Avoid  areas with  submerged objects or
                          shallow water.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Do not pull the remote control levers back   Leave a “float plan” with a responsible per-
                          to idle when trying to steer away from ob-  son on shore. Tell where you plan to go and
                          jects—you need throttle to steer. Always  when you plan to arrive, and provide a de-
                          check throttle, shift, and steering controls  scription of your boat. Advise this person if
                          for proper operation before starting boat.  your plans change and also when you ar-
                         Operate within your limits and avoid ag-  rive to prevent false alarms. A sample float
                          gressive maneuvers to reduce the risk of  plan is included on page 208.
                          loss of control, ejection, and collision.   Follow navigation rules and state and local
                                                               laws that apply to your boat.








                        14]]></page><page Index="27"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 15  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                           Operational requirements            Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                         The operator and all passengers must wear  the PFD and keep it free from the steering
                          a U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved per-  wheel or other controls so that the engines
                          sonal flotation device (PFD).        stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                                               helm. Failure to attach the engine shut-off
                                                1              cord (lanyard) could  result in a runaway
                                                               boat if the operator is ejected.
                                                               After operation, remove the engine shut-off
                                                               cord (lanyard) and the main switch keys to
                                                               avoid accidental starting or unauthorized
                                                               use by children or others.

                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S


                        1  PFD                                             1

                         Eye protection is recommended to keep
                          wind, water, and glare from the sun out of                2
                          your eyes while you operate your boat. Re-
                          straining straps for eyewear are made
                          which are designed to  float should  your
                          eyewear fall in the water.
                         Never operate the boat after consuming al-
                          cohol or taking drugs.              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                         For reasons of safety and proper care of
                          the boat, always perform the pre-operation
                                                              252SE / 252SD
                          checks listed on page 144 before operating
                          the boat.
                         Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                          ed seating area, place  feet  on the deck,                 2
                          and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                          straps when the boat is in motion.
                         Always consult your doctor on whether it is    1
                          safe for you to ride in this boat if you are
                          pregnant or in poor health.
                         Do not attempt to modify this boat.
                          Modifications  to  your boat may reduce
                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                          safety and reliability, and render the boat
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          unsafe or illegal to use.




                                                                                               15]]></page><page Index="28"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 16  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                         Scan  constantly  for swimmers and stay   Required equipment
                          away from swimming areas. Swimmers are  The  U.S. Coast Guard  (USCG) has  regula-
                          hard to see and you could accidentally hit  tions which describe minimum standards of
                          someone in the water.               safety. You must comply with these regula-
                         Avoid being hit by another boat. You  tions, which  apply to boats like your boat
                          should always take responsibility to watch  which are less than 26 feet long.
                          for traffic; other boaters may not be watch-   Personal flotation devices (PFD):
                          ing for you. If they do not see you, or you  Type I, II, or III as required for all people on
                          maneuver more quickly than other boaters  board (see “Operational requirements” for
                          expect, you risk a collision.        more information), plus at least one Type IV
                         Maintain a safe distance from other boats  (throwable type).
                          and watercraft, and  also watch  for  ski   Fire extinguisher:
                          ropes or fishing lines. Obey the “Rules of  At least one 5-B (B-1) type hand-held por-
                          the road”, and be sure to check behind you  table fire extinguisher.
                          before  making a turn.  (See  “Rules of the   Visual distress signals:
                          road” on page 20.)                   It is recommended that a USCG-approved
                                                               day/night pyrotechnic device be stored on
                                                               your boat. A mirror can also be used as an
                                                               emergency signal. Contact  your  Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer or the Coast Guard for more
                                                               information.
                                                               Sound signalling device:
                                                               Your boat is equipped with a horn that can
                                                               be used to signal other boats. See “Rules
                                                               of the road” for more information.
                                                               Navigation lights:
                                                               Your boat is equipped  with navigation
                                                               lights for use between sunset and sunrise,
                                                               and during periods of reduced visibility,
                                                               such as fog. Be sure these lights are work-
                                                               ing and  are turned on when  necessary.
                                                               (See pages 68, 94, and 116 for more infor-
                                                               mation.)














                        16]]></page><page Index="29"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 17  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                              Additional equipment                  Hazard information
                                recommendations                Never start the engines or let them run for
                        The following equipment can help make your  any length of time in an enclosed area. Ex-
                        boating experience safer and more enjoy-  haust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a
                        able:                                  colorless, odorless gas that may cause
                         Mooring fenders and lines.           loss of consciousness and death within a
                         Anchor with suitable line (a “Danforth” type  short time. Always operate the boat in an
                          anchor and line that is at least 6 times the  open area.
                          depth of the water where you will drop an-  It is also important to have the engines off
                          chor are recommended).               when anyone is using the ladder on models
                         Manual-type bilge pump.              equipped with one because of the carbon
                         First-aid kit.                       monoxide in the exhaust gases coming
                         Waterproof flashlight with extra batteries.  from underneath the step.
                         Tool kit with assorted screwdrivers, pliers,   Do not touch the hot muffler or engine dur-
                          wrenches (including metric  sizes), and  ing or immediately after engine operation;
                          electrical tape.                     they can cause serious burns.
                         Oar  or paddle  (look  for one with a  boat   Do  not place  magnets or objects  with a
                          hook on the other end).              strong magnetic force near the throt-
                         Spare parts, such as fuses.          tle/shift paddles. The electronic  throttle
                         Navigation charts for the waters where you  mechanism of the paddles can be adverse-
                          will be boating.                     ly affected, which could cause loss of con-
                         Tow-rope.                            trol.  In addition, do  not place objects
                                                               susceptible to magnetic forces (i.e., credit
                                                               cards, watches, etc.) close to the paddles.




























                                                                                               17]]></page><page Index="30"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 18  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                              Boat characteristics             Keep away from the intake grates while the
                         Jet thrust turns the boat. Moving the re-  engines  are on. Items such as  long  hair,
                          mote control levers completely back to idle  loose clothing, or PFD straps can become
                          or the neutral position produces only mini-  entangled in moving parts, resulting in se-
                          mum thrust. If you are traveling at speeds  vere injury or drowning.
                          above  trolling, you will have rapidly de-   Never insert any object into the jet thrust
                          creasing ability to steer without throttle.  nozzles while the engines are running. Se-
                          You may still have some turning ability im-  vere injury or death could result from com-
                          mediately after moving the remote control  ing in contact with the rotating parts of the
                          levers back to idle, but once the engines  jet pumps.
                          slow down, the boat will no longer respond
                          to steering  wheel input until  you apply
                          throttle again or you reach a trolling speed.
                          Practice turning in an open area without
                          obstructions until you have a good feel for                         2
                          the maneuver.
                         This  Yamaha boat is  water-jet propelled.
                          The pumps are directly connected to the       1
                          engines. This means that the jet thrust will
                          produce some  movement whenever  the
                          engines are running. The boat has a “neu-  1  Intake grate
                          tral” position, but since the boat is always  2  Jet thrust nozzle
                          producing thrust while the engines are run-
                          ning, some forward or reverse movement   Stop the engines and remove the clip from
                          may occur.                           the engine shut-off switch before removing
                         Do not use the reverse function  to slow  any debris or weeds, which may have col-
                          down or stop the boat above trolling speed  lected around the jet intakes. (See page
                          as it could cause you to lose control, be  196 for more information.)
                          ejected, or impact the steering wheel  or
                          other parts of the boat. This could increase
                          the risk of serious injury. It could also dam-
                          age the shift mechanisms.
                         Reverse can be used to slow down or stop
                          during slow-speed maneuvering, such as
                          when docking. Once the engines are idling,
                          shift to reverse and gradually increase en-
                          gine speed. Make sure that there are no
                          obstacles  or people behind you before
                          shifting into reverse.





                        18]]></page><page Index="31"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 19  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                 Night operation                 Wakeboarding and water-
                         When using your boat before dawn or after         skiing
                          dusk, you must have both bow and anchor  You can use the boat to tow a wakeboarder
                          lights  operating. When  at anchor in the  or water-skier, using the tow pylon or the ski
                          dark, the anchor light must be lit. (See pag-  tow hook provided.
                          es 59, 76, and 116 for instructions.)  It is the boat operator’s responsibility to be
                         The  navigation  lights should be replaced  alert to the safety of the wakeboarder or wa-
                          after a certain period of time.     ter-skier and others. Know and follow all state
                          If the navigation light bulb is an incandes-  and local regulations in effect for the waters
                          cent bulb, replace it after 1 year.  in which you will be operating.
                          If the navigation light bulb is LED, replace it  The following are some important consider-
                          every 5 years.                      ations for  minimizing risks while  pulling  a
                         Except for AR250 / SX250: Docking lights  wakeboarder or water-skier.
                          are to be used for low speed, close-quarter   The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                          maneuvering only. Docking  lights  may  wear an approved PFD, preferably a bright-
                          cause temporary blindness in other vessels  ly colored one so boat operators can see
                          when used improperly.                the person being pulled.
                                                               The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               wear protective clothing. Severe internal in-
                                                               juries can occur if water is forced into body
                                                               cavities as a result of falling into the water
                                                               or while reboarding.  Normal swimwear
                                                               does not adequately protect against force-
                                                               ful water entry into the rectum or vagina.
                                                               The  person being pulled should wear  a
                                                               wetsuit bottom or clothing  that provides
                                                               equivalent protection. Such clothing in-
                                                               cludes thick, tightly woven, sturdy, and
                                                               snug-fitting apparel such  as denim,  but
                                                               does not include spandex or similar fab-
                                                               rics, like those used in bicycle shorts.

















                                                                                               19]]></page><page Index="32"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 20  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                         A second person should be on board as a     Rules of the road
                          spotter to watch the wakeboarder or wa-  Your Yamaha boat is legally considered a
                          ter-skier; in most states, it is required by  powerboat. Operation of the boat must be
                          law. Let the person being pulled direct the  in accordance with the rules and regula-
                          operator’s control of speed and direction  tions governing the waterway on which it
                          with hand signals.  Be sure the seat is  is used.
                          locked in place (see page 102) before get-  Just as there are rules that apply when you
                          ting underway.                      are driving on streets and highways, there are
                         When preparing to pull a wakeboarder or  waterway rules that apply when you are oper-
                          water-skier, operate the boat at the slowest  ating your boat. These rules are used interna-
                          possible speed until the boat is well away  tionally, and are also enforced by the United
                          from the person being pulled and slack in  States Coast Guard and local agencies. You
                          the tow-rope is taken up. Make sure that  should be aware of these rules, and follow
                          the rope is not looped around anything.   them whenever you encounter another vessel
                          After checking that the wakeboarder or wa-  on the water.
                          ter-skier is ready and that there is no traffic  Several sets of rules prevail according to
                          or other obstacles, apply enough throttle to  geographic location, but are all basically the
                          raise the person.                   same as the International Rules of the Road.
                         Make smooth, wide turns. The boat is ca-  The rules presented here in this owner’s/op-
                          pable of very sharp turns, which could ex-  erator’s manual are condensed, and have
                          ceed the  abilities of the wakeboarder  or  been  provided for  your convenience only.
                          water-skier. Keep the person being towed  Consult your local U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
                          at least 50 m (164 ft), about twice the dis-  or Department of Motor Vehicles for a com-
                          tance of a standard tow-rope, away from  plete set of rules governing the waters in
                          any potential hazard.               which you will be operating your boat.
                         The operators of boats and other water-  Steering and sailing rules
                          craft may not be aware that you are pulling  Whenever two vessels on the water meet one
                          a wakeboarder or water-skier. Together  another, one vessel has the right-of-way; it is
                          with the  spotter, pay  attention to  others  called the “stand-on” vessel. The vessel that
                          around you and cruise at safe speeds.  does not have the right-of-way is called the
                         Be alert to the hazard of the tow-rope han-  “give-way” or “burdened” vessel. These rules
                          dle  snapping  back at the boat when the  determine which vessel has the right-of-way,
                          wakeboarder or water-skier falls or is un-  and what each vessel should do.
                          able to get up.                     Stand-on vessel
                        See pages 8 and 125 for wakeboard tower  The vessel with the right-of-way has the duty
                        use.                                  to continue its course and speed, except to
                                                              avoid an immediate  collision.  When you
                                                              maintain your direction and speed, the other
                                                              vessel will be able to determine how best to
                                                              avoid you.




                        20]]></page><page Index="33"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 21  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        Give-way vessel                       In the following illustration, your boat is in the
                        The vessel which does not have the right-of-  center. You should give the right-of-way to
                        way has the duty to take positive and timely  any vessels shown in the white area (you are
                        action to stay out of the way of the stand-on  the give-way vessel). Any vessels in the shad-
                        vessel. Normally, you should not cross in  ed area must yield to you (they are the give-
                        front of the vessel with the right-of-way. You  way vessels). Both you and the meeting ves-
                        should slow down or change directions brief-  sel must alter course to avoid each other.
                        ly  and pass  behind the other vessel. You
                        should always move in such a way that the
                        operator of the other vessel can see what you
                        are doing.
                        The General Prudential  Rule regarding the
                        right-of-way is that if a collision appears un-
                        avoidable, neither boat has the right-of-way.
                        Both boats must avoid the collision.
                        In other words, follow the standard rules ex-
                        cept when a collision will occur unless both
                        vessels try to avoid each other. If that is the
                                                              Meeting
                        case, both vessels become give-way ves-
                                                              If you are meeting another power-driven ves-
                        sels.
                                                              sel head-on, and are close enough to run the
                        Rules when encountering vessels
                                                              risk of collision, neither of you has the right-
                        There are three main situations that you may
                                                              of-way. Both of you should alter course to
                        encounter with other vessels which  could
                                                              avoid an accident. You should keep the other
                        lead to a collision unless the Steering Rules
                                                              vessel on your port (left) side. This rule does
                        are followed:
                                                              not apply if both of you will clear one another
                        Meeting: you are approaching another vessel
                                                              if you continue on your set course and speed.
                        head-on.
                        Crossing: you  are traveling  across another
                        vessel’s path.
                        Overtaking: you are passing or being passed
                        by another vessel.















                                                                                               21]]></page><page Index="34"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 22  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                        Crossing                              Other special situations
                        When two power-driven vessels are crossing  There are three other rules you  should be
                        each other’s path close enough to run the risk  aware of when operating your boat around
                        of collision, the vessel which has the other on  other vessels.
                        the starboard (right) side must keep out of the  Narrow channels and bends
                        way of the other. If the other vessel is on your  When navigating in narrow channels, you
                        starboard (right) side, you must keep out of  should keep to the right when it is safe and
                        its way; you are the give-way vessel. If the  practical to do so. If the operator of a power-
                        other vessel is on your port (left) side, remem-  driven vessel is preparing to go around a
                        ber that you should maintain course and di-  bend that may obstruct the view of other wa-
                        rection, provided the other vessel gives you  ter vessels, the operator should sound a pro-
                        the right-of-way, as it should.       longed  blast of four to six seconds  on  the
                                                              horn. If another vessel is around the bend, it
                                                              too should sound the horn. Even if no reply is
                                                              heard, however, the vessel should still pro-
                                                              ceed around the bend with caution.
                                                              Fishing vessel right-of-way
                                                              All vessels fishing with nets, lines, or trawls
                                                              are considered to be “fishing vessels” under
                                                              the International Rules. Vessels with trolling
                                                              lines are not considered fishing vessels. Fish-
                                                              ing vessels have the right-of-way regardless
                                                              of position. Fishing vessels cannot, however,
                        Overtaking                            impede the passage of other vessels in nar-
                        If you are passing another vessel, you are the
                                                              row channels.
                        give-way vessel. This means that the other
                                                              Sailing vessel right-of-way
                        vessel is expected to maintain its course and
                                                              Sailing vessels should normally be given the
                        speed. You must stay out of its way until you
                                                              right-of-way. The exceptions to this are:
                        are clear of it. Likewise, if another vessel is
                                                              (1) When the sailing vessel is overtaking the
                        passing you, you should maintain your speed
                                                                 power-driven  vessel, the power-driven
                        and direction so that the other  vessel can
                                                                 vessel has the right-of-way.
                        steer itself around you.
                                                              (2) Sailing vessels should keep clear of any
                                                                 fishing vessel.
                                                              (3) In a  narrow channel, a sailing vessel
                                                                 should not hamper the safe passage of a
                                                                 power-driven vessel that can navigate
                                                                 only in such a channel.
                                                              Reading buoys and other markers
                                                              The waters of the United States are marked
                                                              for safe navigation by the lateral system of
                                                              buoyage. Simply put, buoys and markers
                                                              have an arrangement of shapes, colors, num-


                        22]]></page><page Index="35"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 23  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        bers, and lights to show which side  of the
                        buoy a boater should pass on when navigat-
                        ing in a particular direction. The markings on
                        these buoys are oriented from the perspec-
                        tive of being entered from seaward (the boat-
                        er is going towards the harbor). Red buoys
                        are passed on your starboard (right) side
                        when proceeding from open water into port,
                        and black buoys are to your port (left) side. An
                        easy  way to  remember  the meaning of the
                        colors  is the phrase “red right returning.”
                        When navigating out of the harbor, your posi-
                        tion with respect to the buoys should be re-
                        versed; red buoys should be  to port and
                        black buoys to starboard.
                        Many bodies of water used by boaters are
                        entirely within the boundaries of a particular
                        state. The Uniform State Waterway Marking
                        System has been devised for these waters.




































                                                                                               23]]></page><page Index="36"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 24  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                        This system uses buoys and signs with distinctive shapes and colors to show regulatory or
                        advisory information. These markers are white with black letters and orange borders. They
                        signify speed zones, restricted areas, danger areas, and general information.





















































                        Remember, markings may vary by geographic location. Always consult local boating author-
                        ities before riding your boat in unfamiliar waters.




                        24]]></page><page Index="37"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 25  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                   Seating locations
                        Sit in the designated locations while sailing.
                        The seating locations are as follows.


















                          : Seating locations
                          : Do not occupy the stern of the boat when engines are running due to the possibility of car-
                           bon monoxide poisoning and of falling.




































                                                                                               25]]></page><page Index="38"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 26  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                            Safety information

                           To get more boating safety           Enjoy your boat responsibly
                                   information                You share the areas you enjoy when operat-
                        Be informed about boating safety. Additional  ing your boat with others and with nature. So
                        publications and information can be obtained  your enjoyment includes a responsibility  to
                        from many organizations,  including the fol-  treat these other people, and the lands, wa-
                        lowing.                               ters, and wildlife with respect and courtesy.
                        United States Coast Guard             Whenever and wherever you are boating,
                        Consumer Affairs Staff (G-BC)         think of yourself as the guest of those around
                        Office of Boating, Public, and Consumer Af-  you. Remember, for example, that the sound
                        fairs                                 of your boat may be music to you, but it could
                        US Coast Guard Headquarters           be just noise to others. And the exciting
                        Washington, D.C. 20593-0001           splash of your wake can make waves others
                        http://www.uscgboating.org            won’t enjoy. Avoid riding close to shoreline
                        Other sources                         homes and waterfowl nesting areas or other
                        You can find local rules by contacting the Na-  wildlife areas, and keep a respectful distance
                        tional Association of State Boating Law Ad-  from fishermen, other boats, swimmers, and
                        ministrators, or your local Power Squadron.  populated beaches. When travel in areas like
                        Boat Education and Training           these  is unavoidable, operate slowly and
                        The Online Boating Safety Course, available  obey all laws.
                        through the watercraft section of  the  Remember that pollution can be harmful to
                        yamaha-motor.com  website, is a free, 50-  the environment. Do not refuel or add oil
                        question learning course available to the  where a spill could cause damage to nature.
                        public. Upon successful completion of 80  Keep your surroundings pleasant for the peo-
                        percent or better, the user can request a cer-  ple  and wildlife that share the  waterways:
                        tificate of completion by mail or can down-  don’t litter!
                        load one immediately. The  Online  Boating  When you go boating responsibly, with  re-
                        Safety Course, provided by  the Boat/US  spect and courtesy for others, you help en-
                        Foundation, is approved by the National As-  sure  that our waterways stay open  for  the
                        sociation of State Boating Law Administra-  enjoyment of a variety of recreational oppor-
                        tors (NASBLA) and recognized by the United  tunities.
                        States Coast Guard. This course meets the
                        education requirement for those states that
                        recognize  non-proctored,  NASBLA-ap-
                        proved courses.
                          The Online Boating Safety Course:
                          http://www.boatus.org/









                        26]]></page><page Index="39"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 27  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description

                                                     Boat glossary



                          TERM          DEFINITION
                          Bow           The front part of the boat.
                          Deck          The “floor” or upper structure which covers the hull.
                          Give-way      The vessel that must yield the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Gunwale       The meeting junction of the deck and hull; the upper edge around the
                                        boat. Pronounced “gunnel.”
                          Hatch         An opening in the deck that provides access below.
                          Helm          The steering console.
                          Hull          The basic part of the boat; the underside.
                          Lanyard       The cord or tether that connects the operator to the engine shut-off
                                        switch so the engines will stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                        helm.
                          PFD           A personal flotation device, also known as “life jacket.”
                          Planing       Traveling at a speed fast enough so the boat has leveled out and is
                                        skimming on top of the water. There is a wake.
                          Port          The left side of the boat.
                          Stand-on      The vessel with the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Starboard     The right side of the boat.
                          Stern         The back part of the boat.
                          Sub-planing   Traveling at a medium speed. The bow of the boat is out of the water,
                                        but you are still traveling through the water. There is a wake.
                          Transom       The vertical part of the stern.
                          Trolling      Traveling at idle speed, using little or no throttle. The boat is down in the
                                        water and it is not leaving a wake.
                          Wake          The visible track of disturbed water that the boat leaves behind as it
                                        moves in the water.














                                                                                               27]]></page><page Index="40"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 28  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description

                                            Location of main components
                        Exterior components
                                                                                  252S / 252SE
                                                                                  / 252SD

                                                 2                                           3
                                         1





                                                                                     4

                                                                              5
                                                                        1


                                                      4
                                              6
                                         7
                                     8
                                9                  13
                                               12
                                           11
                                       10
                                                                                             14

                                                                                         4



                                    17                                        15
                                                                          16
                                                                       4
                                         18                      11
                        1  Handrail                           10 Table bracket (page 123)
                        2  Windshield (page 115)              11 Flushing hose connector (page 174)
                        3  Swim platform shower (page 121)    12 12 V DC outlet (page 124)
                        4  Cleat                              13 Ski tow hook
                        5  Fuel tank filler cap (page 136)    14 Horn (page 153)
                        6  Anchor storage compartment (page 107)  15 Bilge pump outlet (page 141)
                        7  Bow eye                            16 Cooling water pilot outlet (page 155)
                        8  Bow light (page 59, 76)            17 Swim platform (page 120)
                        9  Bow ladder (page 119)              18 Reboarding grip


                        28]]></page><page Index="41"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 29  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description








                           252SE / 252SD                      252S
                                      2         3                       5       3



                                                                 4
                               1





                           AR250                              SX250
                                     5  6                            7        8



                              4











                        1  Wakeboard tower (page 125)
                        2  Bimini top (page 132)
                        3  Anchor light (page 116)
                        4  Wakeboard tower (page 125)
                        5  Bimini top (page 128)
                        6  Anchor light (page 116)
                        7  Anchor light (page 117)
                        8  Bimini top (page 133)












                                                                                               29]]></page><page Index="42"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 30  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description

                        Seats & interior components










                               1      2                    3         4         5       6
















                              12     11                      10         9     8    7   6









                        1  Front starboard seat (front) (page 102)
                        2  Front starboard seat (rear) (page 102, 107)
                        3  Driver’s seat (page 103)
                        4  Rear starboard seat (page 102, 108)
                        5  Starboard engine hood seat (page 102, 106)
                        6  Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE / 252SD)
                           (page 105)
                        7  Center seat (page 104)
                        8  Port engine hood seat (page 102, 106)
                        9  Rear port seat (page 102, 109)
                        10 Passenger’s seat (page 102, 104)
                        11 Front port seat (rear) (page 102, 107)
                        12 Front port seat (front) (page 102)





                        30]]></page><page Index="43"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 31  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description



                                                                                  3
                                          1






                                                                4
                                          2                                                  6
                                                                          5

                                  7
                                                    8
                                                                        9

                                                                                   10

















                                                           11
                        1  Anchor storage compartment (page 107)
                        2  Front underseat storage compartment (page
                           107)
                        3  Stowable table (page 111)
                        4  USB charger (page 124)
                        5  Glove compartment (page 112)
                        6  Enclosed head compartment (page 109)
                        7  Stern storage compartment (page 114)
                        8  Wet storage compartment (page 113)
                        9  Driver’s side console compartment (page 110)
                        10 Ski locker (page 108)
                        11 Rear underseat storage compartment (page
                           108)


                                                                                               31]]></page><page Index="44"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 32  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description



                          Courtesy (Interior) light











                          Beverage holder










                          Speaker






                                                                        *1


                                                               *1 = Except for AR250 / SX250
























                        32]]></page><page Index="45"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 33  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Stern components







                                                                  1






                              2                                                           2
                                     3                                             3
                                         4                                     4
                                                   5
                                                       6










                                7                            8                9         7


                        1  Stern ladder (page 120)
                        2  Stern eye
                        3  Shift gate (page 43)
                        4  Jet thrust nozzle
                        5  Underwater light (page 94)
                        6  Articulating keel (except for 252SD) (page 44)
                        7  Intake grate
                        8  Hull drain plug (page 140)
                        9  Water temperature/water depth sensor














                                                                                               33]]></page><page Index="46"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 34  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description

                        Helm components
                        AR250 / SX250

                                1    2


                                                       4              5
                               HORN
                                     BILGE



                                  3                                             6




                                                                                   7      8














                                                       12
                                                                            10
                                                                                            9
                                                                           11
                           13


                        1  “HORN” switch (page 51)            11 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 39)
                        2  “BILGE” switch (page 51)           12 Steering wheel (page 44)
                        3  Main switch (page 41)              13 Tilt lever (page 45)
                        4  Multi-function display unit (page 51)
                        5  Wireless charger (page 125)
                        6  Controller (page 53)
                        7  USB charger (page 124)
                        8  Aux input (page 67)
                        9  Remote control lever (page 42)
                        10 Engine shut-off switch (page 39)


                        34]]></page><page Index="47"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 35  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description

                        252S






                                                       2               3




                                  1                                             4
                                                                                   5
                                                                                       6
                                                                                         7
                                                                                        8
                                                                             10
                                                                                  9








                                                            14       15
                                                       16
                                                                            12
                                                                                            11
                                                                            13
                           17


                        1  Main switch (page 41)              12 Engine shut-off switch (page 39)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 77)  13 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 39)
                        3  Wireless charger (page 125)        14 USB charger (page 124)
                        4  Controller (page 78)               15 Aux input (page 93)
                        5  “HORN” switch (page 76)            16 Steering wheel (page 44)
                        6  “BILGE” switch (page 76)           17 Tilt lever (page 45)
                        7  “BLOWER” switch (page 76)
                        8  “ACC”2 switch (page 76)
                        9  “ACC”1 switch (page 76)
                        10 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (page 76)
                        11 Remote control lever (page 42)


                                                                                               35]]></page><page Index="48"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 36  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description

                        252SE / 252SD

                                   1
                                               2       3
                                                                       4




                                                                                5
                                                                                   6
                                                                                       7
                                                                                        8
                                                                                        9

                                                                             11

                                                                                   10




                                               18

                                                  16       17                13
                           19
                                                                             14          12


                                                                             15


                        1  “START/STOP” button (page 41)      14 Engine shut-off switch (page 39)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 77)  15 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 39)
                        3  Throttle/shift paddle (252SD)      16 USB charger (page 124)
                        4  Wireless charger (page 125)        17 Aux input (page 93)
                        5  Controller (page 78)               18 Steering wheel (page 44)
                        6  “HORN” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 76)  19 Tilt lever (page 45)
                        7  “BILGE” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 76)
                        8  “BLOWER” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 76)
                        9  “ACC”2 switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 76)
                        10 “ACC”1 switch (252SE / 252SD) (page 76)
                        11 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (252SE / 252SD) (page
                           76)
                        12 Remote control lever (page 42)
                        13 Main switch (page 41)

                        36]]></page><page Index="49"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 37  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Engine components
                        1800 cc engine models



                                            2                         1        2







                            1
                                                                                           3
                            3














                                                        5
                                                                   6    7         4
                               4










                        1  Blower (page 151)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 201)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 138)
                        4  Engine cover (page 182)
                        5  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        6  Dipstick (page 138)
                        7  Air filter case






                                                                                               37]]></page><page Index="50"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 38  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Description

                        1900 cc engine models



                                   2                              1           2











                                                                                             3
                           1
                           3                                                                 4

                           6













                              5                                          5





                        1  Blower (page 151)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 201)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 138)
                        4  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        5  Dipstick (page 138)
                        6  Engine cover (page 182)












                        38]]></page><page Index="51"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 39  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                             Boat control functions           AR250 / SX250 / 252S
                        Engine shut-off switch
                             WARNING
                         Always attach the engine shut-off cord                       1
                          (lanyard) to your PFD before starting the
                          engines. Failure to attach the cord could
                          result in a runaway boat if the operator is           2
                          ejected.
                         Do not attach the cord to clothing that           3
                          could tear loose. Do not route the cord
                          in such a way that it could become en-  1  Engine shut-off switch
                          tangled, preventing it from functioning.   2  Clip
                         Avoid accidentally pulling the cord dur-  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          ing normal operation. Once the engines
                                                              252SE / 252SD
                          have stopped, you have no steering con-
                          trol of the boat which could result in an
                          accident. Also, without  engine power,
                          the boat could slow rapidly from planing                       1
                          speed. This could cause people and ob-
                          jects in the boat to be thrown forward,
                          which could cause injury.                                      2
                        The clip  on the  end of  the engine  shut-off
                        cord (lanyard) must be attached to the engine                    3
                        shut-off switch  for the  engines to run. The
                        cord must be attached to a secure place on  1  Engine shut-off switch
                        the operator’s PFD. Should the operator fall  2  Clip
                        overboard or leave the helm, the cord will pull  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        out the clip, stopping the ignition to the both
                        engines. This will prevent the boat from run-  TIP:
                        ning away under power.                It is recommended that a spare engine shut-
                                                              off cord (lanyard) be stored in a storage com-
                                                              partment near the driver’s  seat to  allow a
                                                              passenger to restart the vessel if the operator
                                                              falls overboard.

                                                              Batteries and battery switches
                                                              The batteries are located in the engine com-
                                                              partment.
                                                              The other battery is designated as the house
                                                              battery. The house battery provides power


                                                                                               39]]></page><page Index="52"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 40  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Control function operation

                        for the various accessory circuits on the boat,
                        such as the circuits for lighting, bilge pump,  1          2
                        blowers and audio system.
                                      2
                               1







                                                              1  ON position (green)
                                                              2  OFF position (red)

                                                              In normal operation, keep the “START” and
                        1  Start battery
                        2  House battery                      “HOUSE” switches in the ON position. Keep
                                                              the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch in the OFF
                        The battery switch assembly is located in the  position. This setting allows both batteries to
                        rear underseat storage compartment (port).  be charged automatically while the engines
                        There are three switches  on  the  battery  are running.  NOTICE: Do  not turn the
                        switch assembly: the  “START”  switch,  “HOUSE” switch to the OFF position if the
                        “HOUSE” switch, and “EMERG PARALLEL”  boat is moored in the water as it will pre-
                        switch.                               vent the anchor light from functioning.
                                                              If  the start  battery is discharged, turn  the
                                                              “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the ON posi-
                                        2                 3   tion to start the engines. Once the engines
                                                              are started  or the start battery is charged,
                                                              turn the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the
                              1                          4    OFF position.







                        1  Battery switch assembly
                        2  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                        3  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)
                        4  “START” switch (red)










                        40]]></page><page Index="53"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 41  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Main switches                         Main switch (252SE / 252SD)
                        (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)                The main switch controls the ignition circuit
                        There is a main switch for each engine.  as follows:
                        The main  switch controls  the ignition  and
                        electrical circuits as follows:                       ON
                                                                      OFF
                               OFF      START
                                     ON

                                                                                         1
                                      HORN
                                             BILGE


                                  1            2
                                                              1  Main switch

                        1  Main switch (port engine)          OFF:
                        2  Main switch (starboard engine)     Ignition circuit is  switched off.  The engines
                                                              cannot be started. (The main switch key can
                        OFF:                                  be removed.)
                        Ignition circuit is switched off.  The engine  ON:
                        cannot be started, but other switches will op-  Ignition  circuit is  switched on. (The main
                        erate. (The main switch key can be removed.)  switch key cannot be removed.)
                        ON:
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main  “START/STOP” buttons
                        switch key cannot be removed.)        (252SE / 252SD)
                        START:                                The engines can  be  started or stopped by
                        The starter motor will turn to start the engine.  pushing the “START/STOP” buttons. It is
                        (When the main switch key is released, it re-  possible to start or stop the engines individu-
                        turns automatically to “ON”.)         ally.
                        TIP:                                   PORT: Port engine
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-   STBD: Starboard engine
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                          The starter motor will turn over without the
                          cord attached.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter
                          motor  will not turn over) if the “START”
                          switch on the battery switch assembly is
                          turned to the OFF position. (See page 39
                          for more information.)





                                                                                               41]]></page><page Index="54"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 42  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Control function operation

                                                              ward position,  and then as the  levers are
                                                              moved farther, accelerates  the  engines for
                                                              more thrust. Moving the levers back from the
                                                              neutral position shifts into the reverse posi-
                                                              tion, and then as the levers are moved farther,
                                                              accelerates the engines for more thrust.
                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S: For cruising, adjust
                                                              the remote control levers so both engines are
                                                              running at the same engine speed.
                                         1                    TIP:

                        1  “START/STOP” button                Because of the mechanical throttle linkage,
                                                              the remote control levers may not be exactly
                        TIP:                                  even with one another when the engines are
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-  running at the same engine speed.
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter
                                                                              N
                          motor  will not turn over) if the “START”    2       1
                                                                    F      5        5    R
                          switch on the battery switch assembly is   3                  4
                          turned to the OFF position. (See page 39
                          for more information.)                  7                         7
                                                                            6     6
                        Remote control levers                  8                              8
                             WARNING
                         Before shifting, make sure there are no
                          swimmers  or obstacles in the water
                                                              1  Neutral position
                          near you.                           2  TDE position
                         When operating in reverse, go slowly.  3  Forward position
                          Do not open the throttle more than half.  4  Reverse position
                          Otherwise, the boat may become unsta-  5  Shift
                          ble, which could result in loss of control  6  Fully closed
                          and an accident.                    7  Throttle
                         Do not shift into reverse while traveling  8  Fully open
                          at planing speeds. Loss of control, boat
                                                              TIP:
                          swamping, or damage to the boat could
                                                              This boat is equipped with a “start-in-gear”
                          occur.
                                                              protection. The engines will not start unless
                        The remote control lever for each engine con-  the levers are in the neutral position.
                        trols both throttle and shifting. In normal op-
                        eration, the levers are moved together.  This boat uses a direct-drive propulsion sys-
                        Moving the  remote control levers  forward  tem. Therefore, jet thrust is always being pro-
                        from the neutral position shifts into the for-  duced while the engines  are  running. The


                        42]]></page><page Index="55"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 43  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        direction of the boat is controlled by the shift
                        gates, which direct the flow of the jet thrust as     N
                        follows:                                    F   1                R

                        Neutral
                        The shift gates are dropped down part way
                        over the jet thrust nozzles. The neutral posi-
                        tion balances forward and reverse thrust to
                        help keep the  boat  from moving, although
                        some movement may occur.
                                                              1  TDE position

                          1

                                                                1
                          2

                                                                2



                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              1  Shift gate
                        Forward
                                                              2  Jet thrust nozzle
                        When the remote control levers are initially
                        moved to the forward position and the boat is  When the remote control levers are moved
                        operating at a slow speed, the shift gates are  farther forward, the shift gates are lifted all the
                        lifted up slightly from the neutral position and  way up.  All  jet thrust is  to the rear, which
                        jet thrust is directed downward at an angle.  moves the boat forward.
                        This function, which is called the thrust direc-
                        tional enhancer (TDE), helps to provide good
                        handling response when the steering wheel is
                        turned, even though there is less thrust avail-
                        able at low engine speeds.













                                                                                               43]]></page><page Index="56"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 44  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Control function operation

                                                              Except for 252SD: In addition, the direction of
                          1                                   the articulating keel changes according to the
                                                              movement of the jet thrust nozzles.
                                                              252SD: When the DRiVE X mode is activated,
                                                              the turning range of the steering wheel is ap-
                          2                                   proximately half the range of when the oper-
                                                              ator is using the remote control  levers
                                                              (running mode or single  lever  mode).  Al-
                                                              though the  turning  range of the steering
                                                              wheel changes depending on the operation
                                                              mode, the movement of the jet thrust nozzles
                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle                  is adjusted automatically so that the full range
                                                              of motion for the nozzles matches the turning
                        Reverse                               range regardless of the selected mode. (See
                        The shift gates are dropped all the way down  page 84 for  information  on each operation
                        over the jet thrust nozzles. Jet thrust is redi-  mode.)
                        rected toward the bow  of the boat, which
                        moves the boat backward.
                                                                               1

                                                                         1     2
                          1                                                  2







                                                              1  Running mode and single lever mode
                                                              2  DRiVE X mode (252SD)
                        1  Shift gate
                        Steering
                        Your boat can be steered by turning the
                        steering wheel the same direction you wish to
                        travel, to the right or left. When the steering
                        wheel is turned, the angle  of the jet thrust
                        nozzles at the rear of the craft is changed,
                        and the change in direction of the jet thrust                    1
                        nozzles changes the direction of the boat ac-  1
                                                                                    2
                        cordingly.
                                                              1  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              2  Articulating keel (except for 252SD)


                        44]]></page><page Index="57"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 45  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Since the strength of the jet thrust determines  To adjust the tilt:
                        the speed and direction of a turn, the throttle  (1) Push the lever down, and then move the
                        must always be opened above idle when at-  steering wheel up or down to the desired
                        tempting a turn, except at trolling speed.  position.
                        Because boats steer from the stern, the stern  (2) The  lever will lock into place when  the
                        of the boat swings out in the opposite direc-  steering wheel is moved into one of the 5
                        tion of your turn. If you turn to starboard, for  available positions.
                        example, the stern of the boat will swing to  (3) Make sure that the tilt lever returns to its
                        the left. Keep this in mind when navigating  original position and that  the steering
                        near a person in the water, such as a down  wheel is securely locked in place.
                        wakeboarder or water-skier, or an obstacle,
                        such as a dock.                           DRiVE X mode (252SD)
                                                              Using the switches equipped on the steering
                        Tilt lever                            wheel, you can perform forward, reverse, and
                             WARNING                          sideways movements at low speed without
                                                              using the remote control levers.
                         Never touch the tilt lever during opera-
                          tion, otherwise the steering wheel could
                          suddenly change  position, which may  1                            6
                          lead to an accident.                  2                            7
                         Be sure the steering wheel is locked in  3                         8
                          position after adjustment. If the steering  4                      9
                          wheel is not locked in position, it may
                          suddenly change position during opera-
                          tion, which may lead to an accident.  5
                        The tilt lever is located  under the steering
                        wheel and is used to adjust the tilt of the  1  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        steering wheel. There are 5 positions.  2  “  ”  switch
                                                              3  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                                                              4  “PIVOT TURN” switch
                                                              5  “MODE” switch
                                                              6  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                                                              7  “  ”  switch
                                                              8  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                                                              9  “HIGH MODE” switch

                                                              To activate DRiVE X mode:
                                          1
                                                              (1) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                                                                 tral position.
                        1  Tilt lever                         (2) Push the “MODE” switch, and there will
                                                                 be a single beep sound and the switch
                                                                 will light up. The mode status and opera-


                                                                                               45]]></page><page Index="58"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 46  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Control function operation

                            tion mode  button on  the multi-function  When the paddle is released, the shift gates
                            display switch.                   return to the  neutral  position and  the boat
                                                              idles.
                                         1
                                                              Sideways movement
                                                              It is possible to move the boat sideways with-
                               NE
                              SW
                                                  DEPTH
                                                  .8 9  ft    out changing the direction of the bow.
                                                              To move sideways to the right, continuously
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              push the “  ” switch, and to move sideways
                                                              to the left, continuously push the “  ”
                          H
                                                              switch.
                                               HOUSE
                                           9   13.0  V
                                                      2       When  the switch is released,  the boat  will
                                 Nav  Anchor
                                                              stop.
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button
                        TIP:
                        Push and hold the “MODE” switch to enter
                        calibration mode.
                        To cancel DRiVE X mode, push the “MODE”
                        switch. Push the switch, and there will be two
                        beep sounds and the switch will turn off.

                        Forward
                        To move forward, pull the throttle/shift pad-
                        dle (right). When the paddle is pulled, the shift
                        gates of both engines will be in the TDE posi-
                        tion, the engine speed will increase, and the
                        boat will move forward at low speed.
                        When the paddle is released, the shift gates
                        return to the neutral position and the boat
                        idles.

                        Reverse
                                                              TIP:
                        To move in reverse, pull the throttle/shift pad-
                                                              While the switch is being pushed continuous-
                        dle (left). When the paddle is pulled, the shift
                                                              ly, the movement of the boat can be adjusted
                        gates of both engines will be in the reverse
                                                              by operating the steering wheel or  throt-
                        position, the engine speed will increase, and
                                                              tle/shift paddle.
                        the boat will move in reverse at low speed.



                        46]]></page><page Index="59"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 47  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Dock hold                             To move forward or in reverse during DOCK
                                                              HOLD operation, pull the throttle/shift pad-
                             WARNING
                                                              dle.
                        The dock hold function  is an auxiliary
                                                              TIP:
                        function for berthing at a dock. The opera-
                                                              Forward and reverse movement can be ad-
                        tor  should not leave the driver's seat in
                                                              justed in 3 steps.
                        case the dock hold function is unexpect-
                        edly disengaged due to the effects of the
                                                              To cancel the  operation,  push the switch
                        wind or the tide.
                                                              again. When the switch is pushed, there will
                        It is  possible to continue moving the  boat  be two beep sounds, and the switch will turn
                        sideways without changing the direction of  off.
                        the bow.
                        To  move sideways to the right,  push the  Pivot turn
                        “   DOCK HOLD”  switch, and  to  move  It is possible to turn the boat while holding the
                        sideways to the  left,  push the “   DOCK  boat’s position.
                        HOLD” switch.                         To  turn the boat, push the  “PIVOT TURN”
                        When the switch is pushed, there will be a  switch. To turn the boat to the right, turn the
                        single beep sound, and the switch will blink.  steering wheel right, and to turn the boat to
                                                              the left, turn the steering wheel left. When the
                                                              switch is pushed, there will be a single beep
                                                              sound, and the switch will light up.
































                                                                                               47]]></page><page Index="60"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 48  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Control function operation

                        To cancel  the operation,  push the “PIVOT
                        TURN” switch again.  When the  switch is
                        pushed, there will be two beep sounds, and
                        the switch will turn off.

                        High mode
                        During DRiVE X mode operation, it is possible
                        to increase the speed to a speed that is high-
                        er than normal speed.                        DRiVE X calibration mode
                        To  increase the speed,  push the “HIGH
                        MODE” switch. When the switch is pushed,
                                                              (3) Push the “HIGH MODE” switch, and se-
                        there will be a single beep sound, and the
                                                                 lect the engine speed.
                        switch will light up.
                                                              (4) Push the switch of the function you want
                        HIGH MODE is applicable to the following
                                                                 to adjust.
                        functions.
                         Sideways movement
                         Dock hold
                         Pivot turn
                                                                1                            3
                        To cancel the  operation,  push the  “HIGH  2                        4
                        MODE” switch again.  When the  switch is
                        pushed, there will be two beep sounds, and
                        the switch will turn off.

                        Sideways movement calibration
                                                              1  “  ”  switch
                        If the boat does not move to the side during
                                                              2  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                        sideways movement, you can adjust the op-
                                                              3  “  ”  switch
                        eration so that the boat moves to the side.
                                                              4  “   DOCK HOLD” switch
                        To perform sideways movement calibration:  (5) When the boat starts moving, operate
                        (1) Put the boat in normal mode.         the steering wheel and throttle/shift pad-
                        (2) Push and hold the “MODE” switch until  dle so that the boat starts moving to the
                            “DRiVE X calibration mode” appears on  side.
                            the multi-function display.       (6) When the “MODE” switch is pushed,
                                                                 “DRiVE X calibration is  successful” is
                                                                 displayed, and the boat returns to normal
                                                                 mode.








                        48]]></page><page Index="61"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 49  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                         Control function operation



                                 NW      N       NE







                                        MPH
                             DRiVE X calibration is successful

                        TIP:
                        Calibration requires adjustment of each com-
                        bination of engine speed and switch for the
                        sideways movement function.

                        To reset the adjustments:
                        (1) Put the boat in normal mode.
                        (2) Push and hold the “MODE” switch until
                            “DRiVE X calibration mode” appears on
                            the multi-function display.
                        (3) When the “MODE” switch is pushed,
                            “DRiVE X calibration data reset” is dis-
                            played, and the boat returns to normal
                            mode.

                                 NW      N       NE






                                        MPH
                              DRiVE X calibration data reset














                                                                                               49]]></page><page Index="62"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 50  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (AR250 / SX250)



                               1     2


                                                       3
                               HORN
                                    BILGE                             4


                                                                                5




                                                                                  6       7












                        1  “HORN” switch
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                        3  Multi-function display unit
                        4  Wireless charger
                        5  Controller
                        6  USB charger
                        7  Aux input



















                        50]]></page><page Index="63"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 51  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                             Multi-function display unit
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-   operation
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                                                              Because the multi-function display unit is
                        erate various functions.
                                                              equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                                     1      2                 the display directly to operate the display
                                                              functions.
                                                              In addition to touching the display, you can
                                                              use the joystick to operate the display func-
                                     HORN
                                            BILGE
                                                              tions.
                                                              Touching the multi-function display




                        1  “HORN” switch                                 NW   N   NE
                                                                 FUEL                   DEPTH
                        2  “BILGE” switch                        50  %     FLOAT MODE   0  Ft
                                                                                °F
                        “HORN” switch                                      Water Temp
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to  START  V          HOUSE  V
                                                                   11.8
                                                                                       11.8
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules  Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                        of the road”. (See page 20.)
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        operating.
                                                              Using the joystick
                        “BILGE” switch                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page  modes.
                        141.)                                  Volume control mode
                        The switch light comes on while the bilge   Navigation control mode
                        pump is operating.                    Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                        TIP:                                  switch the operation mode.
                        Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                                               1
                        will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        battery switch is in the on position.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                                                                                               51]]></page><page Index="64"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 52  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                        52]]></page><page Index="65"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 53  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             Operating the boat at a steady speed
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  (cruise assist)
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  speed operation when the boat is traveling
                        functions.                            above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are
                        Controller                            running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                                                              rpm.
                                      1  2 3                  To activate the cruise assist:
                                                              (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                                                                 are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                                 or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                 the cruise assist is activated, “CRUISE
                                       4   5                     ASSIST” and  the cruise assist setting
                                                                 level will be displayed  under  the  boat
                                Name           Function
                                                                 speed.
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                          screen. (See page 85.)
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                            ton           control mode and the
                                          navigation control
                                          mode. When the main
                                          switches are turned to
                                          the on position, the                MPH
                                          volume control mode
                                          is selected by default.         CRUISE ASSIST:
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                            ton           ly selected item.                         1
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the   1  Cruise assist setting level
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  engine speed can be increased by pushing
                            ton                                the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                                                               creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                                                               WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                                                               ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                                                               ments above or below the initial cruise
                                                               assist setting. Each time a button is
                                                               pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                               decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.


                                                                                               53]]></page><page Index="66"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 54  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                          ing the remote control levers.      no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                                                              “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.  Perform one of the following operations.
                        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting   Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                        level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-  repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                        ed.                                    Push the remote control levers forward to
                                                               open the throttle.
                        Operating the boat with a minimal
                        wake (no-wake mode)                   Operating the boat in reverse with
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        the engines are operating at idle speed.  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         boat may become unstable, which could
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            position or forward position so that both  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  verse and both engines are operating at
                            ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode   the same engine speed.
                            setting level will be displayed under the  (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            boat speed.                          and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                                                 (+) button.
                                  SE      S      SW
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                              pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                                                              approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                                                              maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                                         MPH                  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                                      No Wake:                the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                                                              justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                                            1
                        1  No-wake mode setting level




                        54]]></page><page Index="67"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 55  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.


























































                                                                                               55]]></page><page Index="68"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 56  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements




                                              1             2             1




                                                     NW      N      NE
                                         FUEL                                 DEPTH
                                        50  %           FLOAT MODE            0  Ft

                                                                 °F
                                                         Water Temp
                                           START                            HOUSE
                                           11.8  V                          11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower              Nav  Anchor

                                                            4    3



                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Status indicator bar






























                        56]]></page><page Index="69"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 57  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Static bar





                                                        NW       NE
                                        FUEL                                  DEPTH
                                 1                                                     4
                                        50  %                                 0  Ft
                                                                                       5
                                 2                                                     6




                                 3                                                     7
                                            START                          HOUSE
                                            11.8  V                        11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower            Nav   Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, orange, and red.
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.
                          3  Start battery voltage val-  Displays the start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             ue
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.
                          5  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 70.)
                          6  Starboard engine ta-  Displays the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          7  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value















                                                                                               57]]></page><page Index="70"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 58  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Center display


                                                  NW         N        NE

                                                       FLOAT MODE


                                                                   °F
                                                        Water Temp
                                                                            1



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.

                        Screen tab bar
                                     1      2     3     4      5      6     7      8








                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 69.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 60.)
                          3  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 60.)
                          4  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 64.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 65.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 68.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 69.)
                          8  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.













                        58]]></page><page Index="71"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 59  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar


                                      1       2             3             4       5

                                     Bilge  Blower                       Nav    Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Indicates the operation setting of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is turned off, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is turned on, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Displays the operating status of the blowers. When the main
                                                 switches are turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 displayed in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Displays the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Displays the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.


























                                                                                               59]]></page><page Index="72"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 60  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE

                         2
                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3

                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading               North at the top of the
                                          of the boat.                       screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  the top of the screen.
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per
                                          hour.                              Zooms out to display a
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating             more distant view of the
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-          map.
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake                Zooms in to display a clos-
                            dicator       mode.                              er view of the map.
                                          When the cruise assist
                                          is activated, “CRUISE
                                          ASSIST” and the                    Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          cruise assist setting
                                          level will be displayed.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No             Opens the track menu.
                                          Wake” and no-wake
                                          mode setting level will
                                          be displayed.                      Displays the Map Settings.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                          ter temperature will be displayed.














                        60]]></page><page Index="73"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 61  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                                                                             Tracks
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                                                    1          2          3
                                     A    B   C
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                                                              To create a track:
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 88)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                                                                                               61]]></page><page Index="74"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 62  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.
                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                                                      Stop Recording Track?
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1
                                                              1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                                                                           Track Manager
                        Check the registered track information with
                        the track manager. (See page 88)             EGG   Save Track?
                                                                     Temp
                        To follow a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.        AMA
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                 “Save”.

                                                              Map settings screen
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”
                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.




                        62]]></page><page Index="75"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 63  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.

                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                     Waypoint Manager
                                                                            waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        map. Hide will make that
                                                                            track invisible.
                                  Lon:       137.5789
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.       Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To
                                                              Satellite status
                             Item            Function
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                                                                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                       waypoint.                  9:47
                                                                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541
                                                                  Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.
                                                                  TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the
                                                                  COG:  0
                                       waypoint on the map.                          S
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                        display “Track Manager”.              Depth / Position
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                                           Depth / Position
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                  DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow         66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                 Close






                                                                                               63]]></page><page Index="76"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 64  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.   Trip screen
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                        Chart Setup                           tion.
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                                                     Economy :
                                       Chart Setup                                0.0 MPG
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                     Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                                          Reset All
                            Close
                                                              1  Menu
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button
                        To perform settings, select the item you want
                        to display.                           The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.




                        64]]></page><page Index="77"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 65  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Name            Function                   Media screen
                         Water         Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to receive a radio
                         Temperature*  temperature in degrees   broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.                  ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                         Average Speed  Shows the average boat   form other functions.
                                       speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of           Source
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.            AM Radio    FM Radio
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine      Weather     Bluetooth
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.                         Auxiliary
                         Starboard     Shows the total number of
                         Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since   Turn Off  Select a Source  Zone Control
                                       the boat was new.
                        * This item cannot be reset.               Item            Function
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:                 plays the AM radio screen.
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that  FM Radio   Switches the source to the
                        you want to reset for several seconds.               FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                        To reset all of the display items:    Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the     displays the weather radio
                        items.                                               screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                                                                                               65]]></page><page Index="78"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 66  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the “   ” or “  ” button.             button for several seconds.

                        Radio screen (AM/FM)                                   1
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control
                                                              Weather screen
                                                              You can receive a weather broadcast.
                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-        NOAA National Weather
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                                                        CH 1 -0.000 kHz
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.
                                                                   1   2   3   4   5   6   7
                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control




                        66]]></page><page Index="79"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 67  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        ton.                                     firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                                                                 played.
                        Bluetooth screen                      (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Smartphones and other external devices that  display unit and the external device.
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        through the audio system’s speakers.
                                                              Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                      Best Of You             tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Foo Fighters
                                      In Your Honor           devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                                              ers.

                                                                             Auxiliary
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.

                                       Displays information about   Source        MPH    Zone Control
                                       the current audio track.



                        To connect an external device:
                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                            “+Add Device”.
                        (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                                                                            1
                            ternal device, and  then search for  the
                            multi-function display unit of the boat.
                        TIP:
                        Make sure that other external devices have
                        their Bluetooth function disabled before be-  1  Auxiliary input jack
                        ginning the pairing  process to reduce  con-
                        nection issues.                       TIP:
                                                               You can adjust the volume level of  the
                                                               speakers using the multi-function display



                                                                                               67]]></page><page Index="80"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 68  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                          unit or the volume control of the external  System control screen
                          device.                             The system control screen can be used to
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external  turn the boat lights on and off.
                          device.                             When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                        Zone control screen                   screen.
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.


                                      Zone Control

                                      100
                                100     100   100




                                                                  Courtesy
                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior

                                                                   Item            Function
                        To adjust the volume:                 Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.                        on or off. (See page 30 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                             of the courtesy lights.)
                            left or right.
                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                        TIP:                                  To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the  Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                        specifications.                       ness for, and move the slider control left or
                                                              right to adjust.

                                                                               1



                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.









                        68]]></page><page Index="81"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 69  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Setting screen              Time setting screen
                        The setting screen can be used to change the  Perform settings related to the time.
                        settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                                                              Time

                                        Menu                         12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                                  Time         Depth
                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4
                                  Unit       Brightness
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                 Wellness     Language
                               Tuner Region  Auto Volume
                                                                 Back
                                                     Reset
                                                              To set the time:
                                                              (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                              Item            Function
                                                                 play.
                         Time          Displays the time setting
                                       screen.                (2) Tap “  ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                         Depth         Displays the depth alarm   set.
                                       setting screen.        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                         Unit          Displays the unit setting   ing time.
                                       screen.
                         Brightness    Displays the brightness
                                       setting screen.        Depth alarm setting screen
                                                              The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                         Wellness      Displays the maintenance
                                       setting screen.        set.
                         Language      Displays the language set-
                                       ting screen.                        Set Depth Alarm
                         Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region
                                       setting screen.
                         Auto Volume   Displays the auto volume               5.0 Ft
                                       setting screen.
                         Reset         Displays the factory reset
                                       screen.
                                                                 Back
                                                                               1
                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                              (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                                                              TIP:
                                                               The water depth can also be adjusted by
                                                               tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.



                                                                                               69]]></page><page Index="82"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 70  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.                        1

                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              1  Slider control
                        Unit setting screen
                        The display units for the multi-function dis-  TIP:
                        play unit can be changed.             The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.
                                        Set Unit
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                       U.S. Std
                                                              Maintenance setting screen
                                U.S. Std        Metric
                                                              This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              the engines have been running since the last
                                                              maintenance.
                            Back
                                                                       Time Since Last Maintenance
                        Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.             Port Engine          0  Hrs

                        Brightness setting screen                  Starboard Engine     0  Hrs
                        The multi-function  display has a day mode
                        and a night mode.
                        The brightness can be set separately for the  Back                Reset
                        day mode and for the night mode.
                                                              After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                      Set Brightness          number of hours of operation as follows.

                                  Night:    30  Day:    90    To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                                                                 number of hours of operation.
                            Back
                                                              TIP:
                                                              To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        To set the brightness:                without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.      the “NO” button.
                        (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                            just.


                        70]]></page><page Index="83"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 71  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Language setting screen
                        The language for the  multi-function  display    Auto Volume Settings
                        unit can be changed.
                                                                   Auto Volume Status:  Off
                                      Set Language
                                                                      Intensity:    1
                                  English     Espanol

                                                                 Back
                                        Francais
                                                              To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.
                            Back                              To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                                                              the up and down arrows.
                        To change the language, tap the desired lan-  To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.
                        guage.
                                                              Factory reset screen
                        Tuner Region setting screen           This screen can be set to the factory settings.
                        Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                        play unit will be used.
                                                                     Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                                                           factory settings?
                                      Tuner Region
                                                                        You cannot undo this action!
                                North America  South America


                                  Japan       Taiwan
                                                                 Cancel                   Conﬁrm
                            Back                              To reset to the factory setting:
                                                              (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                        To change the tuner region, tap the desired  (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                        region.                                  pears, tap the “YES” button.
                        Auto Volume setting screen
                        Auto Volume  will automatically  control the
                        level of volume when overcoming wind or en-
                        gine noise.









                                                                                               71]]></page><page Index="84"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 72  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.



                                                    NW       N N     NENE
                                                    NW
                                      FUEL
                                                                                DEPTH
                                      F F FUEL                                  DEPTHTHH
                                                          Check Engine !
                                  1   50 50 50 5  % % %  FLOAT MODE E            0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                                         L
                                                        F
                                                           AT M
                                                              O
                                                               D
                                                         O
                                  2                Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                  °F °F
                                                                        OK
                                                        W ater  T em
                                                        Water Tempp
                                          TAR
                                         S
                                         STARTT                               HOUSEE S
                                                                              HO
                                                                               U
                                          1.
                                         11.8 8  V V                          11. 8  V V
                                         1
                                                                              11.8
                                                                               h
                                                                              nc
                                                                        N
                                               Blower
                                         Bil ge  Bl ower                Navav  A Anchor o r
                                         Bilge
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage detected.
                         Check Battery
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Joystick Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.

                        72]]></page><page Index="85"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 73  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a                       2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 138 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 196.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                                                                        1
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                                                                                               73]]></page><page Index="86"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 74  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  ble. (See page 136 for information on filling
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 54 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 69 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        204.

                        House/Start Battery voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                        74]]></page><page Index="87"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 75  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                     Helm controls (except for AR250 / SX250)

                                        1              2 2      3








                                                               252S            252SE / 252SD
                                                                    4               4   5
                                                                        5                  6
                                                                           6
                                                                                            7
                                                                           7

                                                                 9               9
                                                                      8                8


                                                                 10       11


                                              12









                        1  Multi-function display unit
                        2  Wireless charger
                        3  Controller
                        4  “HORN” switch
                        5  “BILGE” switch
                        6  “BLOWER” switch
                        7  “ACC”2 switch
                        8  “ACC”1 switch
                        9  “NAV LIGHT” switch
                        10 USB charger
                        11 Aux input
                        12 Steering wheel





                                                                                               75]]></page><page Index="88"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 76  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                          The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  operating.
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                        erate various functions.              “BILGE” switch
                        252S                                  Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page
                                                              141.)
                                                              The switch light  comes on while the  bilge
                                                1             pump is operating.
                                                              TIP:
                                                    2
                                                              Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                      3       will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                                                      4       battery switch is in the on position.
                                            6
                                                5             “BLOWER” switch
                                                              Turns the blowers on or off. (See page 151.)
                        1  “HORN” switch                      The switch light comes on while the blowers
                        2  “BILGE” switch                     are operating.
                        3  “BLOWER” switch
                        4  “ACC”2 switch                      “ACC”1/“ACC”2 switch
                        5  “ACC”1 switch                      These switches can be used to operate an
                        6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              electronic device that is installed later as an
                                                              accessory.
                        252SE / 252SD
                                                              For more information, contact a  Yamaha
                                                              Boat Dealer.
                                               1
                                                    2         “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              Turns the navigation lights (anchor light and
                                                      3       bow light) on or off. Each time the switch is
                                                              pushed, the combination of lights that are on
                                                     4
                                                              or off changes in the following 3 patterns.
                                            6
                                                5             Switch   Anchor   Bow   Multi-function
                                                              light   light  light   display
                                                              Off     Off    Off     -
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              On      On     On
                        2  “BILGE” switch                                                Nav
                        3  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              On      On     Off
                        4  “ACC”2 switch                                                Anchor
                        5  “ACC”1 switch
                        6  “NAV LIGHTS” switch

                        “HORN” switch
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules
                        of the road”. (See page 20.)
                        76]]></page><page Index="89"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 77  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                           Multi-function display unit        Volume control mode
                                    operation                 Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                                                              volume.
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.                                            VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                        In addition to touching the display, you can       HOME   CANCEL
                        use the joystick to operate the display func-
                        tions.                                                         1

                        Touching the multi-function display                 CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                                                 RUNNING MODE
                                      SE  S  SW
                             FUEL                    DEPTH
                             100 %                   .8 9  ft  Navigation control mode
                              19                    19
                                  x1000 rpm     x1000 rpm     (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                                         MPH
                              START                 HOUSE        lected setting or item.
                              13.0  V  9          9  13.0  V
                                   Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        Using the joystick                                             1
                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        modes.
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                         Volume control mode
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                         Navigation control mode
                        Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                        switch the operation mode.
                                         1                    (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                                                                 or confirm a setting.
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL



                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                        1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                                                                                               77]]></page><page Index="90"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 78  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                     Operation buttons
                                                              In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                                                              play directly, you can use the operation but-
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL            tons and the controller to operate  various
                                                              functions.
                                                              Controller
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                           1   2 3
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        TIP:
                        Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        plain how to make selections by touching the
                        display, you can also make selections using         CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                        the joystick knob.
                                                                             4   5
                                                                      Name          Function
                                                               1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                                                               screen. (See page 85.)
                                                               2  “VOLUME  –   Switches the joystick
                                                                  (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                                                                  ton          control mode and the
                                                                               navigation control
                                                                               mode. When the main
                                                                               switches are turned to
                                                                               the on position, the
                                                                               volume control mode
                                                                               is selected by default.
                                                               3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                                                                  ton          ly selected item.
                                                               4  “CRUISE/NO   Activate and set the
                                                                  WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                                                                  ton          mode, and reverse
                                                               5  “CRUISE/NO   RPM control. (See the
                                                                  WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)
                                                                  ton


                                                              Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                              (cruise assist)
                                                              The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                                                              speed operation when the boat is traveling
                                                              above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are


                        78]]></page><page Index="91"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 79  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        running above  3000  rpm and below  7000  To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        rpm.                                  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        To activate the cruise assist:        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        (1) Push the remote control levers forward  When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting
                            to open the throttle until the desired en-  level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-
                            gine speed is reached and both engines  ed.
                            are operating at the same engine speed.
                        (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button  Operating the boat with a minimal
                            or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When  wake (no-wake mode)
                            the cruise  assist is activated,  “CRUISE  The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                            ASSIST” and  the cruise assist  setting  boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.
                            level  will be displayed under  the boat  This is especially convenient when traveling
                            speed.                            in harbors, channels, or other areas posted
                                                              with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                                  SE      S      SW           The no-wake mode can be  activated only
                                                              when the engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              To activate the no-wake mode:
                                                              (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE
                                                                 position or forward position so that both
                                         MPH                     engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-
                                    CRUISE ASSIST:
                                                                 ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-
                                              1                  ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode
                                                                 setting level will be displayed under the
                        1  Cruise assist setting level
                                                                 boat speed.
                         Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                          engine speed can be increased by pushing
                          the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                          creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                          WAKE” (–) button. However, the  adjust-
                          ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                          ments above or below the initial cruise             MPH
                          assist setting. Each  time a button is            No Wake:
                          pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                          decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.                    1
                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  1  No-wake mode setting level
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-
                          ing the remote control levers.      The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                                                              speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                                                              no-wake  mode is activated, push the




                                                                                               79]]></page><page Index="92"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 80  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”    (+)  button  or  To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.          Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        To deactivate the no-wake mode:       crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        Perform one of the following operations.  rpm.
                         Push the “CRUISE/NO  WAKE” (–) button
                          repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                         Push the remote control levers forward to
                          open the throttle.

                        TIP:
                        252SD: If the throttle/shift paddles are oper-
                        ated in the DRiVE X mode while the no-wake
                        mode is activated, the no-wake mode will be
                        deactivated.

                        Operating the boat in reverse with
                        more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be pre-
                        pared to reduce throttle as soon  as the
                        boat moves  as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        boat may become unstable, which could
                        result in loss of control and an accident.
                        To activate the reverse RPM control:
                        (1) Move the remote control levers back-
                            ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            verse and both engines are operating at
                            the same engine speed.
                        (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                            (+) button.
                        Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                        pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                        will increase the available  engine speed by
                        approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                        maximum  of 6000 rpm, and pushing  the
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                        the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                        justment is limited to these 3 increments.


                        80]]></page><page Index="93"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 81  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                              1         2          3        4                   5    6    7
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                                     SE     S      SW
                           FUEL                                                             DEPTH
                           100 %                                                            .8 9  ft

                               19                                                        19
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpm
                                                           MPH
                              START                                                     HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9                                           9    13.0  V
                                          Bilge  Blower               Nav  Anchor
                           16 15 14     13                 12                 11    10   9   8
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Shows the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 95.)
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Shows the engine speed.
                          3  Center display      Shows various information for each screen tab.
                          4  Screen tab bar      Shows the tabs for the various screens that can be shown on the
                                                 center display.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Shows the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 96.)
                          7  Mode status         Shows the current mode. (See page 84.)
                          8  Depth level bar graph  Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the depth
                                                 alarm setting and detected water depth, the color of the bar graph
                                                 segments changes.
                          9  House battery voltage  Shows the house battery voltage in a bar graph format and numer-
                                                 ical format.
                         10  Operation mode button  Switches the operation mode. This button can be used only when
                                                 the remote control levers are in the neutral position. (See page 84.)
                         11  Starboard shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the starboard jet thrust nozzle.
                                                 This indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         12  Status indicator bar  Shows the operating status of various functions and displays warn-
                                                 ings.
                         13  Port shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the port jet thrust nozzle. This
                                                 indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         14  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on the
                                                 warnings present.
                         15  Start battery voltage  Shows the start battery voltage in a bar graph format and numeri-
                                                 cal format.
                         16  Fuel level bar graph  Shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending on
                                                 the amount of remaining fuel, the color of the bar graph segments
                                                 changes.
                                                                                               81]]></page><page Index="94"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 82  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        If the multi-function display unit is turned on while the engines are stopped, the display unit
                        will enter the float mode.
                        When the multi-function display unit is in the float mode, the following items are different than
                        they are in the running mode.
                                                  1                   2

                                                                        FLOAT MODE

                                FUEL                                                  DEPTH
                                 100 %       FM Radio                                 .8 9  ft

                                                                   Water Temp
                                      19  107.7 MHz                               19
                                                Her By                    °F



                                     START                                        HOUSE
                                    13.0  V  9                              9    13.0  V
                                                   Bilge  B       Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Audio system function  Shows the selected function of the audio system.
                          2  Water temperature   Shows the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.


                        Screen tab bar
                                          1     2     3     4     5     6     7




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 85.)
                          2  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 85.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 89.)
                          4  Drive control screen tab  Displays the drive control screen. (See page 90.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 91.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 94.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 95.)




                        82]]></page><page Index="95"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 83  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                        1      2            3            4      5

                                       Bilge  Blower                    Nav   Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Shows the operating status of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is stopped, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is operating, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Shows the operating status of the blowers. When the house bat-
                                                 tery switch is turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 shown in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Shows the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Shows the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                                                                                               83]]></page><page Index="96"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 84  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Operation mode                        DRiVE X mode “  ” (252SD)
                        When the engines are running and both re-  Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        mote control levers are in the neutral position,  gine speed and  the throttle  and shifting of
                        the operation mode can be changed by tap-  both engines are controlled using the throt-
                        ping the operation mode button.       tle/shift paddles and steering wheel switches.
                                                              “DRiVE X” is shown for the mode status.
                                         1     2
                                                              Use this mode to make small throttle adjust-
                                                              ments  when operating  the boat at  slow
                                        RUNNING MODE
                                                              speeds, such as when docking. (See page 45
                               NE
                              SW
                                                  DEPTH       for information on the throttle/shift paddles.)
                                                  .8 9  ft
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are moved from
                          H
                                               HOUSE           the neutral position to the forward or re-
                                           9   13.0  V
                                 Nav  Anchor                   verse position while the DRiVE X mode is
                                                               activated, the operation mode will change
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button               to the running mode.
                                                               When the DRiVE X mode is activated, the
                        Float mode                             engine speed will be controlled.
                        Both engines are stopped. “FLOAT-MODE”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The audio system function and water temper-
                        ature are shown instead of the port and star-
                        board tachometers.

                        Running mode “  ”
                        The port and starboard remote control levers
                        control the throttle and shifting for their re-
                        spective engines.  “RUNNING-MODE” is
                        shown for the mode status.

                        Single lever mode “  ”
                        Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        gine  speed and the throttle  and shifting of
                        both  engines are  controlled using only  the
                        port remote control lever. “SINGLE-LEVER”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The starboard remote control lever is not
                        used.






                        84]]></page><page Index="97"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 85  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen shows the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE
                         2

                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Expands the size of the
                         1  Boat speed    Shows the boat speed               map, or returns it to the
                                          in miles per hour or ki-           original size.
                                          lometers per hour.                 Shows the direction of
                         2  Heading       Shows the heading of               North at the top of the
                                          the boat.                          screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         3  Cruise  as-   Shows whether the
                            sist/no-wake   cruise assist or no-              the top of the screen.
                            mode status in-  wake mode is activat-
                            dicator       ed.                                Zooms out to display a
                                          When the cruise assist             more distant view of the
                                          is activated, “CRUISE              map.
                                          ASSIST” and the
                                          cruise assist setting              Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          level will be displayed.           er view of the map.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No
                                          Wake” and no-wake                  Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          mode setting level will
                                          be displayed.
                                                                             Opens the track menu.


                                                                             Displays the Map Settings.














                                                                                               85]]></page><page Index="98"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 86  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                                                                             Tracks
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                                                    1          2          3
                                     A    B   C
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                                                              To create a track:
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 88)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                        86]]></page><page Index="99"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 87  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.
                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                                                      Stop Recording Track?
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1
                                                              1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                                                                           Track Manager
                        Check the registered track information with
                        the track manager. (See page 88)             EGG   Save Track?
                                                                     Temp
                        To follow a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.        AMA
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                 “Save”.

                                                              Map settings screen
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”
                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.




                                                                                               87]]></page><page Index="100"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 88  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.

                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                     Waypoint Manager
                                                                            waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        map. Hide will make that
                                                                            track invisible.
                                  Lon:       137.5789
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.       Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To
                                                              Satellite status
                             Item            Function
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                                                                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                       waypoint.                  9:47
                                                                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541
                                                                  Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.                       TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the   COG:  0
                                       waypoint on the map.                          S
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                                                              Depth / Position
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT                      Depth / Position

                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft         DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                                                                    66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                                 Close






                        88]]></page><page Index="101"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 89  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.   Trip screen
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                        Chart Setup                           tion.
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                                                     Economy :
                                       Chart Setup                                0.0 MPG
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                     Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                                          Reset All
                            Close
                                                              1  Menu
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button
                        To perform settings, select the item you want
                        to display.                           The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.





                                                                                               89]]></page><page Index="102"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 90  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation


                             Name            Function               Drive control screen
                         Water         Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to set a target speed
                         Temperature*  temperature in degrees   for the boat, increase the set speed.
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.
                         Average Speed  Shows the average boat     WKS  WKB
                                       speed in miles per hour or   Target Speed  21.0
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of   Acceleration  Fast
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.              Set                      Save
                         Starboard     Shows the total number of
                         Engine Hours*  hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since
                                       the boat was new.      To activate the drive control:
                                                              (1) Tap the tab you want to set.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                              (2) Tap the target speed.
                                                              (3) To set  the speed,  tap each digit and
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:
                                                                 scroll  up or down, and  then tap  the
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                                                                 “Back” button.
                        you want to reset for several seconds.
                        To reset all of the display items:
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                        items.
                                                                          8         0

                                                                          9         1




                                                              (4) Tap the desired acceleration profile.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              You can select from “Manual”, “Slow”, and
                                                              “Medium”.

                                                              (5) Tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (6) Select the characters you want to  set,
                                                                 tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (7) After setting the preceding items, tap the
                                                                 “Set” button.



                        90]]></page><page Index="103"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 91  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (8) Move the remote control levers to the ful-  Media screen
                            ly open position.                 This screen can be used to receive a radio
                        TIP:                                  broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                         If the remote control levers are moved  ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                          slowly to the fully open position, the boat  form other functions.
                          may not accelerate according to the select-
                          ed acceleration profile or reach the set tar-
                                                                             Source
                          get speed.
                         If the single lever mode is activated, move  AM Radio    FM Radio
                          only the remote control lever for the port
                                                                       Weather     Bluetooth
                          engine to the fully open position. (See page
                          84 for information on the single lever mode        Auxiliary
                          button.)
                         252SD: While the DRiVE X mode is activat-
                                                                 Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control
                          ed, the drive control mode cannot be used.
                                                                   Item            Function
                        To deactivate the drive control:
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                            neutral position.                                plays the AM radio screen.
                        (2) Tap the “CANCEL” button.          FM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                                                              Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                                                                             displays the weather radio
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                                                                                               91]]></page><page Index="104"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 92  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the  “    ”  or  “  ”  button.        button for several seconds.

                                                                               1
                        Radio screen (AM/FM)
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control

                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.

                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.





                        92]]></page><page Index="105"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 93  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Weather screen                        To connect an external device:
                        You can receive a weather broadcast.  (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                                                                 “+Add Device”.
                                                              (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                   NOAA National Weather
                                                                 ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                                                 multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                   CH 1 -0.000  kHz           TIP:
                                                              Make sure that other external devices have
                             1   2   3    4   5   6   7
                                                              their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                                                              ginning the pairing  process  to reduce  con-
                                                              nection issues.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                                                              (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                        ton.                                     played.
                                                              (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Bluetooth screen                         display unit and the external device.
                        Smartphones and other external devices that
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                        through the audio system’s speakers.  Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Best Of You             devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                      Foo Fighters            ers.
                                      In Your Honor

                                                                             Auxiliary

                           Source            MPH   Zone Control


                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                       Displays information about
                                       the current audio track.






                                                                                               93]]></page><page Index="106"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 94  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                   System control screen
                                                              The system control screen can be used to
                                                              turn the boat lights on and off.
                                                              When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                                                              screen.
                                                       1





                        1  Auxiliary input jack

                        TIP:
                         You can adjust the volume level of the
                          speakers using  the multi-function  display  Courtesy
                          unit or the volume control of the external
                          device.
                                                                   Item            Function
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external
                                                              Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                          device.                                            on or off. (See page 30 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        Zone control screen                                  of the courtesy lights.)
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.  Docking    Turns the docking lights on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Tower          Turns the tower lights on or
                                      Zone Control                           off.
                                                              Helm           Turns the illumination on or
                                      100                     (252SE / 252SD)  off for the panels on the
                                100     100   100                            port and starboard sides of
                                                                             the steering wheel.
                                                              Shower (252S /   Turns the shower pump on
                                                              252SE / 252SD)  or off. (See page 121 for in-
                                                                             formation on the shower.)
                                                              Underwater     Turns the underwater lights
                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior
                                                                             on or off.

                        To adjust the volume:                 To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.         Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the  ness for, and move the slider control left or
                            left or right.                    right to adjust.
                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                        TIP:
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                        specifications.


                        94]]></page><page Index="107"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 95  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                                       Setting screen
                                         1
                                                              The setting screen can be used to change the
                                                              settings of the multi-function display unit.

                        1  Slider control
                                                                              Menu
                        TIP:                                           Time         Depth
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-    Unit        Brightness
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                                                                     Tuner Region  Auto Volume

                                                                                           Reset

                                                                   Item            Function
                                                              Time           Displays the time setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Depth          Displays the depth alarm
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Unit           Displays the unit setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Brightness     Displays the brightness
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Wellness       Displays the maintenance
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Language       Displays the language set-
                                                                             ting screen.
                                                              Tuner Region   Displays the tuner region
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Auto Volume    Displays the auto volume
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              DRiVE X (252SD)  Displays the DRiVE X set-
                                                                             ting screen.
                                                              Reset          Displays the factory reset
                                                                             screen.
















                                                                                               95]]></page><page Index="108"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 96  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Time setting screen                    If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                        Perform settings related to the time.  depth alarm will not operate.

                                         Time                 (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                12-Hour:   24-Hour:
                                                              Unit setting screen
                                                              The display units for the multi-function dis-
                               GMT Offset:    -4
                                                              play unit can be changed.
                             Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                                                             Set Unit
                            Back
                                                                             U.S. Std

                        To set the time:                              U.S. Std       Metric
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                            play.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-  Back
                            set.
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                            ing time.                         Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.

                        Depth alarm setting screen            Brightness setting screen
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be  The multi-function display has a day mode
                        set.                                  and a night mode.
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                                     Set Depth Alarm          day mode and for the night mode.


                                                                           Set Brightness
                                        5.0 Ft
                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90


                            Back
                                         1

                        1  Slider control                        Back
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.  To set the brightness:
                        TIP:                                  (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by  (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.       just.


                        96]]></page><page Index="109"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 97  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                              Language setting screen
                                         1                    The language for the  multi-function  display
                                                              unit can be changed.


                        1  Slider control                                  Set Language

                        TIP:
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.                     Francais

                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                                 Back
                        Maintenance setting screen
                        This screen displays the number of hours that
                        the engines have been running since the last  To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        maintenance.                          guage.

                                                              Tuner Region setting screen
                                 Time Since Last Maintenance
                                                              Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs      play unit will be used.


                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                                            Tuner Region

                                                                     North America  South America
                            Back                     Reset
                                                                       Japan        Taiwan
                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the
                        number of hours of operation as follows.  Back

                        To reset the number of hours of operation:
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.           To change the tuner region, tap the desired
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-  region.
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.     Auto Volume setting screen
                        TIP:                                  Auto Volume will automatically control  the
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen  level of volume when overcoming wind or en-
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap  gine noise.
                        the “NO” button.




                                                                                               97]]></page><page Index="110"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 98  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                              Factory reset screen
                                    Auto Volume Settings      This screen can be set to the factory settings.

                              Auto Volume Status:  Off
                                                                     Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                                                           factory settings?
                                Intensity:     1
                                                                        You cannot undo this action!

                            Back

                        To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.  Cancel             Conﬁrm
                        To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                        the up and down arrows.               To reset to the factory setting:
                        To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.  (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                        DRiVE X setting screen (252SD)           pears, tap the “YES” button.
                        Settings related to DRiVE X can be changed
                        on this screen.


                                     DRiVE X Settings

                                Display Tips
                                Default RPM    STD
                                Neutral Steering Assist

                            Back

                        To  switch between displaying  and hiding
                        pop-ups when using the DRiVE X function,
                        select Display Tips.
                        To switch between normal and high engine
                        speeds when operating in DRiVE X mode, se-
                        lect either “STD” or “HIGH” for Default RPM.
                        Even if the remote control lever is in the neu-
                        tral  position, if the boat speed  is about
                        10 km/h or more, select Neutral Steering As-
                        sist (function that assists turning) to turn neu-
                        tral steering assist on or off.





                        98]]></page><page Index="111"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 99  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                               1
                                                                                R RUNNING MODE
                                   0
                                  1 10:27 am                                    RUNNING MODE
                                    27
                                    :
                                      am
                                                     N NEE  N N    N NWW
                           FU
                           FUELEL                                                           D D DEPTH
                                                                                            DEPTH
                           100
                           100
                           100 %                          Check Engine !                    .8 9.8 ftt ft 8 9 9 9
                              %
                              %
                           100%
                                                          S
                                                          SPEEDPEED
                                                   Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                               19 19                                                     19 19
                                       x1000 rp                              x1000 rp m
                                                                             x1000 rpm
                                       x1000 rpmm
                                                                    mp  OK
                                                                    mphh
                                                                                        H
                                                                                         OUSE
                              STAR                                                      HOUSE
                              STARTT
                              13.0 0  V V  9 9                                     9 9  13.0  V V
                                                                                        13.0
                              13.
                                                                              o
                                                                             h
                                                                             c
                                                                      Na
                                                                           A
                                                                            n
                                          Bilgee
                                          Bil g  Bl o w e r           Navv  Anchorr
                                               Blower
                                                               2
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage detected.
                         Check Battery
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Joystick Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                                                           Surfpointe is in deploy state. Reduce Speed.
                         Surfpointe Communication Failure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.
                                                                                               99]]></page><page Index="112"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 100  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-  252S / 252SE / 252SD
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil                    1  2
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  TIP:
                        oil level. (See page 138 for engine oil level  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        checking procedures.)                 are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to  ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        engine.                               clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                                                              pump clean-out procedure” on page 196.
                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-  1
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and  1  Intake grate
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                        100]]></page><page Index="113"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 101  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  ble. (See page 136 for information on filling
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 79 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 96 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        204.

                        Low/High voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                                                                                             101]]></page><page Index="114"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 102  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                       Seats                   ator or striking a passenger,  which
                                                               could result in an accident.
                             WARNING
                        Passengers must always sit in a designat-                           1
                        ed  seating area, place feet on  the  deck,
                        and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                        straps when the boat is in motion.

                        This  boat  is equipped with the following
                        seats.
                         1 2 3                     4  5  1



                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                                                              These cushions can also be used to create a
                                                              temporary center seat.




                        1  Handrail
                        2  Front port seat (rear)
                        3  Front port seat (front)
                        4  Front starboard seat (front)                                     1
                        5  Front starboard seat (rear)
                        Two bow filler cushions are provided for use
                        while the boat is not being operated.
                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                        These cushions can be used to make a large
                        flat area in the bow for use as a sundeck.
                        To remove or install the bow filler cushions,
                        lift up the front seats (rear).
                             WARNING
                         Do not use the bow filler cushions while
                          the boat is underway.  A passenger
                          could lose balance and fall on the deck
                          or overboard, causing injury or death.
                         Stow the cushions securely before oper-
                          ating the boat. A loose cushion could be
                          blown by the wind, distracting the oper-




                        102]]></page><page Index="115"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 103  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              To swivel the seat:
                                                              Lift up the swivel lock lever, move the seat to
                                                              the desired position, and then release the le-
                                                              ver. If it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the
                                                              seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning the
                                                              swivel friction knob in or out.
                                                      5
                                      2    3                           1
                                              4
                                     1
                        1  Rear starboard seat
                        2  Starboard engine hood seat                                       2
                        3  Port engine hood seat
                        4  Rear port seat
                        5  Handgrip

                        Driver’s seat
                                                              1  Swivel lock lever
                        The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                                                              2  Swivel friction knob
                        ward, and the seat can swivel, and the back-
                        rest angle can be adjusted. In addition, the  To flip up the seat bolster:
                        seat bolster at the front of the seat can be  Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat
                        flipped up to change the seat style for a  so that it is resting against the backrest.
                        raised seating position.
                        Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                        place before getting underway.
                        To slide the seat:
                        Lift up the slide lock lever, move the seat to
                        the desired position, and then release the le-
                        ver.


                             1                                    1

                                                              1  Seat bolster








                        1  Slide lock lever




                                                                                             103]]></page><page Index="116"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 104  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To use the armrests:                  Passenger’s seat
                        Lower the armrests until they stop.   The passenger’s seat can be adjusted in the
                                                              same ways as the driver’s seat.
                                                              See “Driver’s seat” for instructions on adjust-
                                                              ing the seat. However, the seat bolster of the
                                                              passenger’s seat cannot be adjusted.

                                                                                   1

                                                     1



                        1  Armrest
                        To adjust the backrest angle:
                        While lifting the adjusting lever on the star-
                        board side of the seat, move the backrest to  1  Passenger’s seat
                        the desired position.
                                                              Engine hood seat
                                                              The position of the backrest for the engine
                                                              hood seats can be changed by pulling  the
                                                              lock lever toward the bow or toward  the
                                                              stern.

                                                                                1



                                                         1
                        1  Adjusting lever
                                                                             2
                        TIP:
                        Depending on the direction and position of
                        the seat, it may not be possible to adjust the
                        backrest angle.                       1  Backrest
                                                              2  Lock lever

                                                              By moving the backrest toward the bow, the
                                                              seating area of the swim platform seats can
                                                              be increased, and by moving the backrest to
                                                              the stern, a seating space for the cabin area
                                                              can be created.


                        104]]></page><page Index="117"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 105  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation


                             WARNING
                                                                             1
                        Do  not sit on the  swim  platform seats
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath the swim
                        platform contain carbon monoxide, a col-
                        orless, odorless gas  which may cause
                        brain damage or death when inhaled.
                        When the backrests are toward the stern, the
                        center seat and the removable backrest can
                        be installed.                         1  Swim platform seat

                                                              Underwater seats (252S / 252SE /
                                                              252SD)
                                               1              The underwater seats can be used to sit in
                                                              the water while  the  boat is  moored or an-
                                                              chored.
                                                2
                                                              Remove the seats  before starting  the en-
                                                              gines, and install the seats  only when the
                                                              boat is stopped and the engines are not run-
                                                              ning.
                        1  Backrest                               WARNING
                        2  Center seat
                                                              Do not sit on the underwater seats while
                                                              the engines  are running.  Exhaust gases
                        The center seat can also be installed upside
                                                              coming from underneath the swim plat-
                        down to use as a beverage holder.
                                                              form contain carbon monoxide, a color-
                                                              less, odorless gas which may cause brain
                        Swim platform seat
                                                              damage or death when inhaled.
                        (252S / 252SE / 252SD)
                        The swim platform seats are provided on the
                        swim platform. WARNING! Do not sit on the
                        swim platform seats while the engines are
                        running. Exhaust gases coming from un-
                        derneath the swim platform contain car-
                        bon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas
                        which may cause brain damage or death
                        when inhaled.
                                                                                   1


                                                              1  Underwater seat



                                                                                             105]]></page><page Index="118"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 106  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To install an underwater seat, fit the seat pole  Engine hood
                        into the seat bracket, and  then  secure the  NOTICE
                        pole by inserting the lock pin.
                                                              When opening the engine hood, keep the
                                                              backrest in the rear position. If the back-
                                                              rest is in the forward position, the engine
                                                              hood may fall, resulting in injury.

                                                              The engine hood can be opened to access
                                                    2         the engines.
                                                              The engine hood latch is located under the
                                                              front of each engine hood seat.
                              1        3                      To prevent  excess water  from spilling onto
                                                              the engines after a rainfall or washing down
                        1  Seat bracket                       the boat, wipe off the seat cushions before
                        2  Seat pole
                                                              opening the engine hood.
                        3  Lock pin
                                                              To  open  the  engine hood, pull the engine
                                                              hood latch up and lift the engine hood.
                        TIP:
                         The underwater seats can also be installed
                          upside down to use as beverage holders.
                         The underwater seats will float if acciden-
                          tally dropped into the water.


                                                                1


                                                                                          2
                                                              1  Engine hood
                                                              2  Engine hood latch
                                                              To close the engine hood, push the front of
                                                              each engine hood seat down to securely lock
                                                              it in place.














                        106]]></page><page Index="119"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 107  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                             Storage compartments             To close the anchor storage compartment:
                        This boat is equipped with the following con-  Close the  anchor  storage compartment lid,
                        venient on-board storage compartments.  and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                        Make  sure that  the storage compartments
                        are securely closed before getting underway.  Front underseat storage
                                                              compartments
                        Anchor storage compartment            The front underseat  storage compartment
                        The anchor storage compartment is located  (starboard) and front underseat storage com-
                        at the bow.                           partment  (port) are located under  the front
                        To open the anchor storage compartment:  starboard seat and front port seat respective-
                        Pull the anchor storage compartment lid latch  ly.
                        to open the lid.                      To open a front underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment, lift the front seat (rear) up.
                                                        1




                             2




                                                                                      1
                        1  Anchor storage compartment lid
                        2  Anchor storage compartment lid latch  1  Front starboard seat (rear)









                                                    1


                                                                  1
                        1  Anchor storage compartment
                                                              1  Front underseat storage compartment
                        When storing the anchor, place some cush-
                        ioning material or the anchor line under the  To close a front underseat storage compart-
                        anchor.                               ment, lower the front seat (rear).





                                                                                             107]]></page><page Index="120"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 108  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Ski locker
                        The ski locker is located under the floor.
                        To open the ski locker:
                        (1) Pull the lock handle up.
                        (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                            open the ski locker lid.

                                                                                  1
                          1


                                                              1  Drain plug

                                                              (2) Securely install the drain plug in its origi-
                                                                 nal position.
                                                         2
                                                              Rear underseat storage compartment
                        1  Lock handle                        (starboard)
                        2  Ski locker lid                     The rear underseat  storage compartment
                                                              (starboard) is located  under  the rear star-
                                                              board seat.
                                                              To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment (starboard), lift the rear starboard seat
                                                              up.



                                                    1
                                                                                            1




                        1  Ski locker
                        To close the ski locker:
                        (1) Close the ski locker lid.
                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise
                                                              1  Rear starboard seat
                            and make  sure that  the lid is  securely
                            closed.
                        (3) Push the lock handle down.
                        To drain water from the ski locker:
                        (1) Remove the drain plug on the bottom of
                            the ski locker to drain the water.




                        108]]></page><page Index="121"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 109  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation





                                           1
                                                                                     1









                        1  Rear underseat storage compartment (star-  1  Rear underseat storage compartment (port)
                           board)
                                                              To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                        To close the rear underseat storage compart-  ment (port), lower the rear starboard seat.
                        ment (starboard), lower the rear starboard
                        seat.                                 Enclosed head compartment
                                                              The port console has a large compartment
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    suitable for use  as an  on-board  changing
                        (port)                                room and can also accommodate a portable
                        The rear underseat storage compartment  toilet (not  included).  WARNING! Carbon
                        (port) is located under the rear port seat.  monoxide (CO) can cause brain damage
                        To open the rear underseat storage compart-  or death. Carbon monoxide can be pres-
                        ment (port), lift the rear port seat up.  ent in this compartment. Signs of carbon
                                                              monoxide  poisoning include nausea,
                                                              headache,  dizziness, drowsiness, and
                           1                                  lack of consciousness. Get fresh air if any-
                                                              one shows signs of carbon monoxide poi-
                                                              soning.
                                                              To open the enclosed head compartment:
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle out.
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                                                                 open the enclosed head  compartment
                                                                 door.
                        1  Rear port seat













                                                                                             109]]></page><page Index="122"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 110  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation




                                                                                      1

                                                                                      2
                                 1




                                                      2

                        1  Lock handle                        1  Head compartment light switch
                        2  Enclosed head compartment door     2  Head compartment light

                                                              To close the enclosed head compartment:
                                                              (1) Close  the enclosed head compartment
                                                                 door.
                                                              (2) Turn the  lock handle  counterclockwise
                                                                 and make sure that the door is securely
                                                                 closed.
                                                              (3) Push the lock handle in.
                                            1                 Driver’s side console compartment
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment is lo-
                                                              cated in front of the helm.
                        1  Enclosed head compartment
                                                              The driver’s side console compartment door
                        There is the head compartment light in the  can be used as a partition in the front walk-
                        enclosed head compartment. To turn on the  through.
                        light, turn the head compartment light switch  To open the driver’s side console compart-
                        to on position. To turn off the light, turn the  ment, unhook the driver’s side console com-
                        light switch to off position. NOTICE: Be sure  partment door latch.
                        the head compartment light is turned off
                        when no one is in the enclosed head com-
                        partment. Leaving the light on can  drain
                        the battery.













                        110]]></page><page Index="123"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 111  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              To use the driver’s side console compart-
                                                              ment door as the partition:
                                                              (1) Unfold the door and guide the edge of it
                                                                 into the channel on the enclosed head
                                                  1              compartment.


                                                                                             1
                                                  2

                                                                                             2
                        1  Driver’s side console compartment door
                        2  Driver’s side console compartment door latch




                                                              1  Edge
                                                              2  Channel
                                                  1
                                                              (2) To hold the door in place, hook the driv-
                                                                 er’s side console compartment door
                                                                 latch to the metal tab on the front side of
                                                                 the door.

                        1  Driver’s side console compartment

                        To close the driver’s side console compart-
                        ment, close the driver’s side console com-                           2
                        partment door, and then hook the latch to
                        securely lock it in place.

                                                                   1

                                                              1  Driver’s side console compartment door latch
                                                              2  Metal tab

                                                              Stowable table
                                                              The stowable table is located in front of the
                                                              passenger’s seat.
                                                              To use the stowable table, pull the table and
                                                              lower it until it contacts the stoppers.




                                                                                             111]]></page><page Index="124"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 112  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation


                                                                                              2



                                                    1




                                                                                         1


                        1  Stowable table                     1  Glove compartment lid
                                                              2  Glove compartment latch







                                                                                          1

                                                   1



                        1  Stowable table
                                                              1  Glove compartment
                          Maximum weight limit:
                                                              To close the glove compartment:
                            9 kg (20 lb)
                                                              Close the glove compartment lid,  and then
                        To stow the stowable table, lift the table and  push it to securely lock it in place.
                        place it in its original position.
                                                              Galley storage compartment (except
                        Glove compartment                     for AR250 / SX250)
                        The glove compartment is located in front of  The galley storage compartment is located to
                        the passenger’s seat.                 the rearward of the driver’s seat.
                        To open the glove compartment:        There is a light inside the galley storage com-
                        While  pulling the glove compartment latch,  partment.
                        pull the glove compartment lid to open it.  The light is equipped with a motion detecting
                                                              sensor.
                                                              To turn the light on, open the galley storage
                                                              compartment lid. To turn the light off, close
                                                              the lid.




                        112]]></page><page Index="125"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 113  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        There is a cooler box under the galley storage
                        compartment.
                        To open the galley storage compartment:
                        Pull the galley storage compartment lid latch
                        to open the lid.





                                                      2
                          1

                                                              To fold the galley table:
                                                              When installing the engine cover, simply re-
                                                              verse the steps for extension.
                          3
                        1  Galley storage compartment lid     Wet storage compartment
                        2  Galley storage compartment lid latch  The wet storage compartment is located un-
                        3  Cooler box                         der the swim platform.
                                                              To open the wet storage compartment:
                        To close the galley storage compartment:
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handles up.
                        Close the galley  storage compartment lid,
                                                              TIP:
                        and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD: The lock handles are
                                                              located under the swim platform seats.
                        To extend the galley table:
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handles clockwise,  and
                        (1) Open the cushion at the rear of the gal-
                                                                 then open the rear platform hatch.
                            ley, and lift up the galley table.
                                                                                     1





                                                                                      2
                                  1



                                                              1  Rear platform hatch
                        1  Galley table
                                                              2  Lock handle
                        (2) Align the edge of the cushion with the
                            groove on the galley table.




                                                                                             113]]></page><page Index="126"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 114  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation


                                                                              1



                                                                                             2






                                                         1
                        1  Wet storage compartment            1  Swim platform seat backrest
                                                              2  Strap
                        To close the wet storage compartment:
                        (1) Close the rear platform hatch.
                        (2) Turn the lock handles counterclockwise
                            and make sure that the hatch is securely
                            closed.
                        (3) Push the lock handles down.
                        TIP:
                         The engines will not start if the rear plat-
                          form hatch is not securely closed.
                         252S / 252SE / 252SD: Snap the buttons
                                                                                    1
                          on the bottom of each swim platform seat
                          onto the button bases.              1  Stern storage compartment (starboard)

                        Stern storage compartments            To close  the stern storage compartment,
                        The stern storage compartments are located  place the backrest in its original position and
                        behind the swim platform seat backrests.  push it to securely lock it in place.
                        To open a stern storage compartment, pull
                        the strap on the swim platform seat backrest.



















                        114]]></page><page Index="127"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 115  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                  Walk-through                           Windshield
                        Front walk-through                    The windshield can be opened and closed.
                        This boat has a large bow  area where two
                                                                  WARNING
                        adults can sit comfortably with their legs out-
                        stretched. The front walk-through provides  To avoid injury, the windshield must be se-
                        easy access to the bow area from the cabin  cured when the boat is in motion.
                        area.
                                                              To close the windshield:
                                                              To close  the windshield, Close the wind-
                              1                               shield, and then turn the windshield latches
                                                              to the lock position.







                                                                     1

                        1  Front walk-through
                        Rear walk-through
                        The rear walk-through has a flat design so
                                                              1  Windshield latch
                        that persons can easily board the boat from
                        the stern area and access the stern area from
                                                              To open the windshield, turn the windshield
                        the cabin area.
                                                              latches to the unlock position, and then open
                                              1               the windshield.












                        1  Rear walk-through











                                                                                             115]]></page><page Index="128"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 116  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (AR250)                      Anchor light
                         NOTICE                                    (252S / 252SE / 252SD)
                                                              The anchor light is located at the top center of
                        Do not attach a ski rope or other tow-rope
                                                              the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                        to the anchor light itself. Otherwise,  the
                                                              around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                        anchor light could be damaged.
                                                              visibility conditions. (See page 94 for informa-
                        The anchor light is located at the top center of  tion on the anchor light on.)
                        the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-  To use the anchor light:
                        around” light for navigation at night or in low-  Pull the lock tab, raise the anchor light, and
                        visibility conditions. (See pages 68 and 94 for  then move the lock tab to its original position
                        information on the anchor light on.)  to lock the anchor light in place.


                                                         1





                                                                                      1




                        1  Anchor light                       1  Lock tab


                                                                              1












                                                              1  Anchor light

                                                              To store the anchor light:
                                                              Pull the lock tab, lower the anchor light, and
                                                              then move the lock tab to its original position
                                                              to lock the anchor light in place.





                        116]]></page><page Index="129"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 117  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (SX250)            (3) Slide anchor light stopper A apart to dis-
                        The boat is equipped with a removable an-  connect.
                        chor light. It is also the “all-around” light for
                        navigation at night or in low-visibility condi-
                        tions. (See page 68 for information on the an-       2
                        chor light on.)
                        The anchor light is stored in the ski locker.
                        To set up the anchor light:
                        (1) Open the ski locker. (See page 108.)

                                                                                     1

                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A
                                                              2  Anchor light stopper B

                                                    1         (4) Extend the anchor light pole, and then fit
                                                                 anchor light stopper A onto the center
                                                                 section of the pole.


                        1  Ski locker
                        (2) Remove the anchor light from the anchor
                            light holder.
                                                                                 1


                                                         1

                                                        2
                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A






                        1  Anchor light
                        2  Anchor light holder











                                                                                             117]]></page><page Index="130"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 118  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (5) Open the cap of the anchor light socket,  (3) Connect the anchor light stopper A by fit-
                            fit the protrusion on the anchor light into  ting the protrusion on it into the slot.
                            the slot in the socket, and then install the
                            light into the socket.





                                                       3
                          1
                                                                                     1

                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A
                                                         2
                        1  Cap                                (4) Install the  anchor light into  the anchor
                        2  Slot                                  light holder, and then close the ski lock-
                        3  Protrusion                            er.
                        (6) Screw anchor light stopper B into the an-
                            chor light socket.


                                  1











                        1  Anchor light stopper B
                        To store the anchor light:
                        (1) Unscrew anchor light stopper B upward,
                            remove the anchor light, and then close
                            the cap of the anchor light socket.
                        (2) Pull anchor light stopper A from the cen-
                            ter section of the anchor light pole, and
                            then fold the pole.






                        118]]></page><page Index="131"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 119  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Bow ladder                 To stow the bow ladder:
                        The bow ladder is located in the anchor stor-  (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                        age compartment.                         lid.
                                                              (2) Raise the bow ladder, and then collapse
                                                                 it.
                                                              (3) Lower the bow ladder into the  anchor
                             2                                   storage compartment, and then slide it
                                                   1             rearward completely.
                                                              (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                     3           lid.





                        1  Bow ladder
                        2  Bow ladder strap
                        3  Anchor storage compartment

                        To use the bow ladder:
                        (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                            lid. (See page 107.)
                        (2) Slide the bow ladder toward the bow.
                        (3) Extend the bow ladder, and then flip the
                            ladder forward and lower it.
                        (4) Close the anchor storage compartment
                            lid to use it as a step.





                                                      1








                        1  Bow ladder









                                                                                             119]]></page><page Index="132"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 120  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                  Swim platform

                             WARNING
                        Stay away from the swim  platform  area
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath it contain
                        carbon monoxide, a  colorless, odorless
                        gas which may cause brain  damage or                        1
                        death when inhaled. Symptoms  include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                        The swim platform area provides a place to  1  Stern ladder
                        stand or sit while putting on skis or a wake-
                                                              (2) Pull the stern ladder out completely, and
                        board, and includes a stern ladder to make
                                                                 then lower it.
                        boarding from the water easier.

                                                       1










                                                              To stow the stern ladder:
                        1  Swim platform
                                                              (1) Raise the stern ladder until it is horizon-
                        Stern ladder                             tal, and then push it forward completely.
                        The stern ladder is stored under  the swim  (2) Push the end of the stern ladder to fit it
                        platform.                                onto the hooks on the boat.
                        To use the stern ladder:
                        (1) Lift the end of the stern ladder to release
                            it from the hooks on the boat.







                                                                             1

                                                              1  Hook



                        120]]></page><page Index="133"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 121  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Swim platform shower (252S / 252SE /
                        252SD)
                                                                                         1
                             WARNING
                         Do not drink water from the shower han-
                          dle. Water in the shower tank is non-po-
                          table.
                         Do not use the  swim  platform  shower
                          when  the boat is  moving. Otherwise,
                          falling overboard may cause injury or
                          death.
                                                              1  Filler fitting cap
                         NOTICE
                                                              (3) Connect a standard garden hose to the
                         Clean the shower handle and hose with  filler fitting.
                          mild soap and water only. Never use sol-  (4) The tank is completely full when water
                          vent-based cleaners on the shower han-  flows out from the overflow vent on the
                          dle or hose.                           starboard side of the boat.
                         Drain the storage tank to less than half
                                                                Shower tank capacity:
                          full if the boat is to be stored or used in
                                                                  37.8 L (10.0 US gal, 8.3 Imp.gal)
                          freezing weather. Freezing  water  can
                          damage the tank.
                        The swim platform shower is located on the
                        swim platform.

                                                                                     1

                                                        1



                                                              1  Overflow vent

                                                              (5) Disconnect the garden hose from the fill-
                                                                 er fitting.
                        1  Swim platform shower cover
                                                              (6) Install the filler fitting cap securely.
                                                              (7) Close the rear platform hatch.
                        To fill the shower tank:
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            113.)
                        (2) Remove the filler fitting cap.




                                                                                             121]]></page><page Index="134"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 122  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To use the shower:
                        (1) Tap the “Shower” button to select the
                            “Shower” button on the system control
                            screen to turn the shower pump on.
                                                                    2
                                                                                      1







                                                              1  Swim platform shower handle
                             Shower  Tower  Courtesy  Dock    2  Flow control button

                                1                             TIP:
                                                              The  shower can  provide up to 5.3 L
                        1  “Shower” button
                                                              (1.4 US gal,  1.2 Imp.gal) per minute  flow
                        (2) Open the swim platform shower cover.  through the retractable shower handle.

                                                              (4) Feed the shower handle hose back into
                                                                 the opening and place the swim platform
                                                                 shower handle in its cradle.
                                                        1
                                                              (5) Close the swim platform shower cover.
                                                              (6) Tap  the “Shower” button to select  the
                                                                 “Shower” button on the system control
                                                                 screen to turn the shower pump off.



                        1  Swim platform shower cover

                        (3) Lift the swim platform shower handle
                            and push the flow control button to dis-
                            charge water.
















                        122]]></page><page Index="135"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 123  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Remote control keypad                 The side table can be installed at the swim
                        The remote control keypad is located on the  platform.
                        starboard side of the swim platform.
                        For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                        system owner’s manual included with your
                        boat.
                                                                   1

                                                       1





                                                              1  Side table
                                                              AR250 / SX250: This model can also be in-
                                                              stalled to the rearward of the driver’s seat.
                        1  Remote control keypad
                                                                                              1
                        Side table

                             WARNING
                        If  the side table is installed at the swim
                        platform, do not use the table while the en-
                        gines are running. Exhaust gases coming
                        from underneath the swim platform con-
                        tain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odor-
                        less gas which may cause brain damage
                                                              1  Side table
                        or death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.

                         NOTICE
                        If  the side table is installed at the swim
                        platform, remove the side table before op-
                        erating the boat. Otherwise, the side table
                        may fall into the water.











                                                                                             123]]></page><page Index="136"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 124  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To install the side table, slide the end of the  USB chargers
                        table pole into  the table bracket until it is  There are the USB chargers on the deck. The
                        locked in place.                      USB charger can be used to charge external
                                                              devices.







                                                                                     1
                          3
                                                  2
                                        1
                        1  Table bracket
                        2  Table pole                         1  USB charger
                        3  Table bracket knob

                        To remove the side table, pull the table brack-
                        et knob, and then pull the table pole upward.

                        Accessory outlet
                        The 12 V DC outlet is shown in the following
                        illustration.
                         NOTICE                                 1
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                        the outlet can be damaged.            1  USB charger

                                                      1



                                                     12V







                        1  12 V DC outlet





                        124]]></page><page Index="137"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 125  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Wireless charger                     Wakeboard tower
                        This boat is equipped with the wireless char-  (except for SX250)
                        gers.                                 The wakeboard tower is provided as an ele-
                        A smartphone that supports wireless charg-  vated tow point suitable for wakeboards and
                        ing will be charged when placed on the wire-  similar towable recreational equipment. The
                        less charger.                         tow pylon can be used to attach a standard
                                                              ski rope or other tow-rope.
                                             1











                        1  Wireless charger


                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Severe injury or death can result if you ig-
                                                              nore any of the following:
                                                               Maximum towing capacity:
                                                               1 Person, 158 kg (350 lb) max.
                                                               Make sure the tow-rope is securely fas-
                                                               tened to the  tow  pylon on the wake-
                                                               board tower.
                                                               Do  not  tow a tube or other inflatable
                                                               from the wakeboard tower. Use the ski
                                                               tow hook on the transom.
                                                               Stay clear of the tow-rope while pulling
                                                               a wakeboard rider or skier.
                                                               Do not climb, hang, or sit on the wake-
                                                               board tower.
                                                               Make sure all knobs or pins securing the
                                                               wakeboard tower are tightened before
                                                               operation and check periodically during
                                                               use.






                                                                                             125]]></page><page Index="138"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 126  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation


                         NOTICE
                                                                                    1
                        Do not modify the wakeboard tower to tow                            2
                        from it or to carry accessories not de-
                        signed for it. The wakeboard tower could
                        be damaged. Also, the wakeboard tower
                        collapsing feature is intended for storage
                        only. The boat should not be transported
                        or operated  with the tower  in the col-
                        lapsed position.

                                                              1  Wakeboard tower
                        Collapsing and setting up the         2  Lock knob
                        wakeboard tower (AR250 / 252S)
                        When storing  the boat, collapse the wake-  (2) Lower the wakeboard  tower until it
                                                                 stops.
                        board tower.
                         NOTICE
                         Accidentally  dropping the wakeboard
                          tower while collapsing or raising it can
                          damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                          assistant needs to help hold the wake-
                          board tower in place during the proce-
                          dure.
                         Do not operate the boat or transport it
                          on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                          lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                          age.                                To set up the wakeboard tower:
                                                              (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:
                                                              (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                        (1) While an assistant supports the wake-
                                                                 board tower, tighten the lock knobs on
                            board tower, completely loosen the lock
                                                                 both sides of the wakeboard tower until
                            knobs on both sides of the wakeboard
                                                                 they stop.
                            tower.













                        126]]></page><page Index="139"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 127  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Collapsing and setting up the
                        wakeboard tower (252SE / 252SD)               1
                        When storing  the boat, collapse the wake-
                        board tower.
                         NOTICE                                     2
                         Accidentally  dropping the upper  tower
                          section while collapsing or raising it can
                          damage the tower, the boat, or both. As-
                          sistants need to support the upper tow-
                          er section during the procedure.
                                                              1  Lock lever
                         Do not operate the boat or transport it
                                                              2  Latch
                          on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                          lapsed position to avoid possible dam-  (3) Lower the wakeboard  tower until it
                          age.                                   stops.
                                                              To set up the wakeboard tower:
                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:
                                                              (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                        (1) Remove the lock knob securing the bimi-
                                                              (2) While assistants  support the wake-
                            ni top to the wakeboard tower.
                                                                 board tower and bimini top, install the
                                                                 latch on both sides of the wakeboard
                                                                 tower.


                                                         1

                                                                        1



                        1  Lock knob

                        (2) While assistants support the  wake-
                            board tower and bimini top, hold down  1  Latch
                            the lock lever and remove the latch on
                                                              (3) Tighten the lock knob to secure the bimi-
                            both sides of the wakeboard tower.
                                                                 ni top to the wakeboard tower.











                                                                                             127]]></page><page Index="140"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 128  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                    Bimini top                (3) Insert the front support poles into  the
                                  (AR250 / 252S)                 mounting holes in the wakeboard tower.
                        Setting up the bimini top
                        To set up the bimini top:                                    2
                        (1) Remove the storage cover, and then un-
                            wrap the bimini top.

                                    1                           1






                                                              1  Mounting hole
                                                              2  Front support pole

                                                              (4) Pull the rear of the bimini top toward the
                                                                 stern, and then unhook the rear support
                        1  Storage cover
                                                                 poles from the main pole.
                        (2) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                            bow, and then open the flap and pull out
                            the front support poles from the bimini
                            top.                                                    2

                                             1


                                                                              1

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Main pole
                                               2


                        1  Front support pole
                        2  Flap












                        128]]></page><page Index="141"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 129  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (5) Push the snap button and extend each  (7) While pulling the main pole down, push
                            rear support pole to the long position.  the snap button and shorten each rear
                                                                 support pole to either the middle position
                                                                 for cruising or to the short position if you
                              1                                  are using the wakeboard tower. Be sure
                              2                                  the snap buttons click into place.

                              3
                              4                                   1
                              5
                                                                  2
                                                                  3
                        1  Rear support pole                      4
                        2  Snap button
                        3  Short position
                        4  Middle position
                        5  Long position
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Short position
                        (6) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                              3  Middle position
                            support pole mounting bracket using the  4  Snap button
                            lock pin.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                  1
                                                               Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                                                               bimini top in the up position.
                                      2          3             Be careful not to push the snap button
                                                               and extend the pole too far. Otherwise,
                                                               the lower section of the pole could fall
                                                               into the water.



                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Lock pin
                        3  Rear support pole mounting bracket













                                                                                             129]]></page><page Index="142"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 130  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Storing the bimini top                (3) Push the snap button and shorten each
                        To store the bimini top:                 rear support pole to the short position.
                        (1) While pulling the main pole down slightly,
                            push the snap button, and then extend
                            each rear support pole to the long posi-  1
                            tion to loosen the bimini top.
                                                                     2
                                1
                                                                     3
                                2


                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                3                             2  Short position
                                                              3  Snap button

                        1  Rear support pole                  NOTICE
                        2  Snap button
                                                              Be careful not to push the snap button and
                        3  Long position
                                                              extend the  pole too far. Otherwise,  the
                        (2) Remove each rear support pole from the  lower section of the pole could fall into the
                            rear support pole mounting bracket by  water.
                            rotating the lock pin.
                                                              (4) Hook the rear support poles  onto the
                                                                 main pole, and then pull the rear of the
                                                  1
                                                                 bimini top toward the bow.

                                      2          3

                                                                                   2

                                                                 1


                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Lock pin
                        3  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Main pole








                        130]]></page><page Index="143"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 131  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (5) Remove the front support poles from the
                            wakeboard tower, and  then place  the         1
                            poles in the flap of the bimini top.


                                                1



                                                                 2


                                                              1  Bimini top
                                                              2  Lock pin

                                                              Installing the bimini top
                        1  Front support pole
                                                              To install the bimini top:
                        (6) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the  When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                            stern, wrap the bimini  top around the  the removal steps, and then make sure that
                            main pole, and then install the storage  the lock pins are securely installed.
                            cover.


                        Trailering with the bimini top
                        The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                        cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        the tow pylon on the wakeboard tower to re-
                        strict movement.

                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top”.
                        (2) While  supporting the bimini top,  rotate
                            the lock pins securing the main pole to
                            the wakeboard tower, and then remove
                            the top.






                                                                                             131]]></page><page Index="144"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 132  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                           Bimini top (252SE / 252SD)
                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Open both flaps on each side of the bimi-               1
                            ni top.


                                           1
                                                                      2

                                                              1  Buckle
                                                              2  Flap

                                                              (4) Slowly pull the bimini top toward the bow
                                                                 and remove it.

                        1  Flap
                                                              Installing the bimini top
                        (2) Loosen the ratchet, and then loosen the  To install the bimini top:
                            strap securing the bimini top.    When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                                                              the removal steps.

                                    1






                              2



                        1  Ratchet
                        2  Flap

                        (3) Open the flaps at the front and rear of the
                            bimini top and release the buckles.













                        132]]></page><page Index="145"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 133  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Bimini top (SX250)            (3) Remove the storage cover, unfold the bi-
                        Setting up the bimini top                mini top, and pull it toward the bow.
                        To set up the bimini top:
                        (1) Raise the  bimini top,  and then unhook
                            the rear support poles from the main           1
                            pole.







                                           1
                                                              1  Storage cover
                                                              (4) Hook the latch on each front strap onto
                                                                 the strap eye.
                        1  Rear support pole

                        (2) Secure each rear support pole to the rear  1
                            support pole mounting bracket using the
                            lock pin. Make sure that the tab on the
                            end of the lock pin is pointing downward.
                                                                    2

                                                                   3
                            1

                                                              1  Front strap
                                                              2  Latch
                                                              3  Strap eye
                               2
                                             3

                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                        3  Lock pin











                                                                                             133]]></page><page Index="146"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 134  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (5) Tighten the front straps so that the top is  To store the bimini top in the upright position:
                            snug and wrinkle free.            (1) Loosen each front strap, and then  un-
                                                                 hook the latch from the strap eye.


                                                                        1






                                                                     2
                                                                    3


                         NOTICE                               1  Front strap
                                                              2  Latch
                        Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the  3  Strap eye
                        bimini top in the up position.
                                                              (2) Pull the bimini top toward the stern, and
                                                                 then fold it.
                        Storing the bimini top in the upright
                        position
                                                                                              1
                         NOTICE
                        Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                        in the fully extended or upright position.
                        When transporting the boat, put the bimini
                        top in the fully collapsed position to avoid
                        damage.


                                                              1  Bimini top

                                                              (3) Install the storage cover.

                                                              Storing the bimini top in the fully
                                                              collapsed position
                                                              To store the bimini top in the fully collapsed
                                                              position:
                                                              (1) Follow the above steps for “Storing the
                                                                 bimini top in the upright position”.
                                                              (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove
                                                                 the lock pins securing the rear support


                        134]]></page><page Index="147"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 135  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                            poles to the rear support pole mounting  Removing the bimini top
                            brackets, and then hook each rear sup-  To remove the bimini top:
                            port pole onto the main pole.     (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                                                                 mini top in the fully collapsed position”.
                                                              (2) Remove the lock pins securing the bimini
                                                                 top to the main pole mounting brackets.


                                                                                   1
                                                    1





                        1  Rear support pole

                        (3) Install the protective cushions around
                            the poles, and then lower the bimini top  1  Lock pin
                            onto the rear deck.
                                                              (3) Remove the bimini top from the boat.


                                         2                    Installing the bimini top
                                                              To install the bimini top:
                                                              When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                               1                              the removal steps, and then make sure that
                                                              the lock pins are securely installed.




                        1  Protective cushion
                        2  Bimini top
                        Trailering with the bimini top
                        The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                        cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        the ski tow hook to restrict movement.




                                                                                             135]]></page><page Index="148"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 136  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                                Fuel requirement              ethanol content does not exceed 10% and
                        Fuel                                  the fuel meets minimum octane ratings. E-85
                                                              is a fuel blend containing 85% ethanol and
                             WARNING
                                                              therefore must not be used in this boat. All
                         Gasoline and  gasoline vapors are ex-  ethanol blends containing more than  10%
                          tremely flammable. To avoid  fires  and  ethanol can cause fuel system damage or en-
                          explosions and to reduce the risk of in-  gine performance problems.
                          jury when refueling, follow these in-  Yamaha does not recommend gasohol con-
                          structions.                         taining methanol because it can cause fuel
                         Gasoline is poisonous and can cause in-  system damage  and engine performance
                          jury or death. Handle gasoline with care.  problems.
                          Never siphon gasoline by mouth. If you  To fill the fuel tank:
                          should swallow some gasoline, inhale a  (1) Before refueling, turn off  the  engines.
                          lot of gasoline vapor, or get some gaso-  Never refuel while smoking, or while in
                          line in your eyes, see your doctor imme-  the vicinity of sparks, open  flames, or
                          diately. If gasoline spills on  your skin,  other sources of ignition.
                          wash with soap and water. If gasoline  (2) Refuel the boat in a well-ventilated area.
                          spills  on your clothing, change  your  If the boat is in the water, be sure it is se-
                          clothes.                               curely  moored to the  fueling dock. All
                                                                 passengers must be out of the boat dur-
                         NOTICE                                  ing refueling.
                                                              (3) Press the fuel tank filler cap button, and
                         Do  not  use leaded gasoline. Leaded
                                                                 then open the fuel tank filler cap.
                          gasoline can seriously damage the en-
                          gines.
                         Avoid getting water and contaminants in
                          the  fuel  tank. Contaminated fuel can
                          cause poor performance  and engine
                          damage. Use only fresh  gasoline that
                          has been stored in clean containers.
                                                                                    1
                          Recommended fuel:
                            Regular unleaded gasoline with a
                                                                                    2
                            minimum octane rating of 86
                            (Pump octane number) = (R + M)/2  1  Fuel tank filler cap
                            90 (Research octane number)       2  Fuel tank filler cap button
                                                              (4) Slowly add fuel to the fuel tank.
                        Gasohol
                                                                Fuel tank capacity:
                        There are two types of gasohol: gasohol con-
                                                                  284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                        taining ethanol and that containing methanol.
                        Gasohol containing ethanol  can be  used if


                        136]]></page><page Index="149"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 137  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        (5) Stop filling when the fuel just becomes  Engine oil requirement
                            visible in the bottom of the filler tube. Do  Engine oil
                            not “top off” the tank, because gasoline  NOTICE
                            could spill out.
                        (6) Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.  Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Usage of 2-
                        (7) Close the fuel tank filler cap by pushing it  stroke engine oil could result in severe en-
                            until it locks in place. Make sure that the  gine damage.
                            fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
                                                              Select an oil grade according to the average
                        Engine Med RX Fuel Additive
                        As the fuel mixture burns in your engine’s  temperatures in the area where the boat will
                                                              be used.
                        combustion chambers, carbon deposits are
                        left behind. Over time, these deposits can re-  Recommended engine oil:
                        duce performance  and even  cause engine  YAMALUBE 4W
                        damage. Marine engines tend to run at lower  Recommended engine oil type:
                        operating temperatures than other engines,  SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-
                        making them more likely to accumulate these  50
                        harmful deposits. Engine Med RX, available  Recommended engine oil grade
                        from your Yamaha Boat Dealer, is formulated  (3-star models):
                        to remove existing deposits and, when used  API SG or higher
                        continuously, prevent new ones from form-  Recommended engine oil grade
                        ing, while also helping to keep fuel injectors  (4-star models):
                        and other fuel system components clean for  API SJ or higher
                        proper performance and longer engine life.
                                                              3-star models




























                                                                                             137]]></page><page Index="150"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 138  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         Checking the engine oil
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                              ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.
                                                              NOTICE

                                                              Make sure debris and water do not enter
                                                              the oil filler hole. Debris and water in the
                        TIP:                                  engine oil can cause serious engine dam-
                        When the engine is operated at high speeds,  age.
                        some engine oil may be consumed. Be sure
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                        to check the engine oil level.
                                                              (1) Place the boat in a precisely level posi-
                                                                 tion on land with the engine stopped. If
                        Why Yamalube
                                                                 the engine was running, allow the engine
                        YAMALUBE oil is a Genuine YAMAHA Part
                                                                 oil to settle by waiting 5 minutes or more
                        born of the engineers’ passion and belief that
                                                                 before checking the oil level.
                        engine oil is an important liquid engine com-
                                                              (2) Open the engine hood. (See page 106.)
                        ponent. We form teams of specialists in the
                                                              (3) Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
                        fields of mechanical engineering, chemistry,
                                                              1800 cc engine models
                        electronics and track testing, and have them
                        develop the engine together with the oil it will
                        use. Yamalube oils take full advantage of the
                        base oil’s qualities and blend in the ideal bal-        1
                        ance of additives to make sure the final oil
                        clears our performance standards. Thus,
                        Yamalube mineral, semisynthetic and syn-
                        thetic oils have their own distinct characters
                        and value. Yamaha’s experience gained over
                        many years of research  and development
                        into oil since the  1960’s helps make
                                                              1  Dipstick
                        Yamalube the best choice for your Yamaha
                        engine.











                        138]]></page><page Index="151"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 139  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        1900 cc engine models                 1900 cc engine models



                                                                                     1
                                                                                        2

                         1





                        1  Dipstick                           1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                        (4) Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick
                            tube  completely. Remove the  dipstick  (5) If the engine oil  level  is  significantly
                            again and check that the engine oil level  above the maximum level mark, consult
                            is between the minimum level mark and  a Yamaha Boat Dealer. If the engine oil
                            maximum level mark.                  level is below the minimum level mark,
                        1800 cc engine models                    add engine oil.
                                                              (6) Remove the engine oil filler cap.
                                                              1800 cc models

                                                                                       1
                                                 1
                                                   2







                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1  Engine oil filler cap
















                                                                                             139]]></page><page Index="152"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 140  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        1900 cc engine models                     Draining the bilge water
                                                              NOTICE

                                                               Do  not  run the engines at  full throttle
                          1                                    when bilge water remains in the engine
                                                               compartment. The bilge water can
                                                               splash into the engines, which can result
                                                               in severe damage.
                                                               Be sure all drain plugs are tightened be-
                                                               fore operating your boat. Otherwise,
                                                               water may flood the boat and cause it to
                        1  Engine oil filler cap               submerge.
                        (7) Slowly add engine oil.
                        (8) Wait approximately  5 minutes to allow  Draining the bilge water on land
                            the engine oil to settle, and then check  This model is equipped with multiple drain
                            the engine oil level again.       plugs.
                        (9) Repeat steps 3–8 until the engine oil is at  Bilge water from the various compartments
                            the proper level.                 flows through drain passages and collects in
                        (10) Install the engine oil filler cap.  the bottom of the hull. The bilge water can be
                        (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure  drained from the boat by removing the hull
                            for the other engine.             drain plugs.
                        (12) Close the engine hood.
                                                              Ski locker










                                                                                  1



                                                              1  Drain plug












                        140]]></page><page Index="153"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 141  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        Engine compartment
                        1800 cc engine models






                                                    1


                                                                                       1
                                                              1  Hull drain plug
                        1  Engine compartment drain plug      Draining the bilge water on water
                                                              This model is equipped with a self-draining
                        1900 cc engine models
                                                              deck and bilge pump to drain the bilge water
                                                              on water.

                                                              Self-draining deck
                                                              Most water that enters the deck area drains
                                                    1         automatically out the stern through the large
                                                              drain hole in the deck.
                                                              A one-way check valve in the drain prevents
                                                              water from traveling back to the deck while
                                                              the boat is moored or moving in reverse.
                        1  Engine compartment drain plug
                                                              Bilge pump
                                                              Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                        To drain the bilge water from the hull:
                                                              tem that channels water that enters the boat
                        Remove the hull drain  plug  at  the stern  to
                                                              from the storage compartments to the bilge
                        drain the water. Check the condition of the O-
                                                              under the engine compartment.
                        ring on the hull drain plug, and then securely
                        install the drain plug.
















                                                                                             141]]></page><page Index="154"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 142  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        When the “Bilge” button is tapped, the bilge  252S
                        pump will operate.


                                                SE                                       1
                           FUEL
                           100 %
                              19
                                      x1000 rpm

                              START
                             13.0  V  9
                                       Bilge  Blower
                                        1                     1  “BILGE” switch
                        1  “Bilge” button
                                                              252SE / 252SD



                                                                                         1







                                                        1
                                                              1  “BILGE” switch
                        1  Bilge pump outlet
                                                               The bilge pump will operate every 2 min-
                        TIP:                                   utes automatically, even if the “Bilge” but-
                         252S / 252SE / 252SD: The “BILGE” switch  ton is not tapped.
                          light comes on while the bilge pump is op-
                          erating.                            Even if the “Bilge” button is not tapped to op-
                                                              erate the bilge pump, the bilge pump will de-
                                                              tect when there is excessive water in the bilge
                                                              and will automatically drain most of it through
                                                              the bilge pump outlet. This function works
                                                              automatically, even if the battery switches are
                                                              turned to the off position.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                                                              the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                                                              bilge water is drained.



                        142]]></page><page Index="155"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 143  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                   First-time operation

                                 Engine break-in
                         NOTICE

                        Failure to perform the engine break-in
                        could result in reduced engine life or even
                        severe engine damage.
                        The engine break-in period is essential to al-
                        low the various components of the engines to
                        wear and polish themselves to the correct
                        operating clearances. This ensures proper
                        performance and promotes longer compo-
                        nent life.
                        (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 138
                            for information on checking  the  engine
                            oil level.)
                        (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.
                            (See page 157 for information on starting
                            the engines.)
                        (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the
                            engines at trolling speed.
                        (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the
                            engines speed below 5000 r/min.
                        (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-
                            gines speed below 6000 r/min.
                        After the engine break-in is complete, the
                        boat can be operated normally.
























                                                                                             143]]></page><page Index="156"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 144  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks


                             WARNING
                        Failure to inspect or maintain the boat properly increases the possibility of an accident
                        or damage to the boat. Do not operate the boat if you find any problem.
                        If a problem cannot be corrected by the procedures provided in this manual, have the
                        boat inspected by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                        Pre-operation checklist
                        Before operating this boat, perform the checks in the following checklist. Always follow the inspec-
                        tion and maintenance procedures and schedules described in this owner’s/operator’s manual.
                        Pre-operation checks should be made each time the boat is used. These checks can be com-
                        pleted in a short time. It is worth the time spent to ensure safety and reliability.
                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         PRE-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Steering system       Check for proper steering operation.       145
                         Remote control levers  Check for proper throttle operation.      145
                                               Check for proper shift operation.
                         Throttle/shift paddles   Check for proper operation.             146
                         (252SD)
                         Fire extinguisher     Check readiness of the extinguisher.       147
                         Hull                  Check hull for damage and cracks before launching.  —
                         Access port caps      Check for proper installation.             148
                         Jet intakes           Check that no debris is in the intakes before launching.  148
                         Fuel system           Check fuel system for leaks.               149
                         Engine oil level      Check engine oil level; add as necessary.  138
                         Batteries             Check battery condition, mounting, and connection.  150
                         Bilge water           Check the engine compartment for bilge water.  150
                         Drain plug            Check the drain plug for damage and foreign material   150
                                               and check that they are securely installed.
                         Engine compartment and   Open the engine hood and check to be sure no gasoline,   151
                         blowers               gasoline vapors, or loose electrical connections are
                                               present. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes.
                         Engine hood           Check that the hood latch is secure.       106
                         Lights and horn       Check lights to be sure they operate. Push the horn but-  152, 153
                                               ton to be sure it operates.
                         Engine shut-off cords (lan-  Check the engine shut-off cords (lanyards) for damage.  154
                         yards)
                         Tower and Bimini top  Check that the tower fasteners are secured.  126, 127
                                               Check that the top is secure.
                         POST-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Switches              Check operation of the main switches and engine shut-  155
                                               off switch.
                         Cooling water pilot outlets  Check that water comes out while the engines are running.  155
                         Fuel level            Check fuel level; add as necessary.        156
                        The steering and shifting pre-operation checks will require two persons: one person to oper-
                        ate the controls and one person to observe the proper operation at the stern.

                        144]]></page><page Index="157"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 145  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                           Pre-operation check points         onds without supplying water, otherwise,
                        Pre-launch checks                     the engines could overheat and/or seize.
                        Perform the pre-launch checks in the pre-op-
                        eration checklist while the boat is on land.

                        Steering system checks
                        Make sure the steering wheel is not loose.
                        There should not be any free play, either in-
                        and-out or in rotation. Turn the steering wheel
                        fully to the right and left to make sure opera-                  1
                                                                   1
                        tion is smooth  and unrestricted throughout                 2
                        the whole range.
                                                              1  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              2  Articulating keel (except for 252SD)

                                                              Remote control lever checks
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not touch the shift gates while the re-
                                                              mote control levers are being operated,
                                          1                   otherwise, you could be pinched.

                                                              Operate the remote control levers several
                        1  Steering wheel                     times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range.
                        Make sure both jet thrust nozzles change di-
                        rections as the steering wheel is turned. The
                        jet thrust nozzles should point to starboard
                        (right) when the wheel is turned to the right.
                        The jet thrust  nozzles should point to port
                        (left) when the wheel is turned to the left.
                        There should not be free play between the
                        steering wheel and the jet thrust nozzles.
                        Except for 252SD: In addition, check that the
                        direction of the articulating keel changes ac-
                        cording to the movement of the jet thrust
                        nozzles.
                        252SD: Start the engines, and then check the
                        steering system.  NOTICE: Do not run the
                        engines over 4000 r/min on land. Also, do
                        not run the engines for more than 15 sec-




                                                                                             145]]></page><page Index="158"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 146  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              Fully open position
                                         N
                               F  2  5   1    5    R            1
                                3                 4
                             7                        7
                                       6     6
                          8                              8      2





                        1  Neutral position
                        2  TDE position                       1  Shift gate
                        3  Forward position                   2  Jet thrust nozzle
                        4  Reverse position
                        5  Shift                              Check that the shift gates are in the fully
                        6  Fully closed                       closed position when the remote control le-
                        7  Throttle                           vers are in the reverse position.
                        8  Fully open                         Fully closed position

                        252SE / 252SD: Start the engines before per-
                        forming the following checks. NOTICE: Do  1
                        not run the engines  over 4000  r/min on
                        land. Also, do not run the engines for more
                        than 15 seconds without supplying water,
                        otherwise, the  engines could overheat
                        and/or seize.
                        Check that the shift gates are slightly above
                        the shift gate neutral position when the re-
                        mote control levers are in the forward posi-
                                                              1  Shift gate
                        tion, and that the shift gates are in the fully
                        open position when the remote control levers  Throttle/shift paddle checks (252SD)
                        are moved farther forward.            Operate  the throttle/shift paddles several
                                                              times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range. Also, make sure
                                                              that the throttle/shift paddles return automat-
                                                              ically to  their original positions  when re-
                                                              leased.









                        146]]></page><page Index="159"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 147  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks



                                  1










                                  1
                        1  Throttle/shift paddle              If you choose to have two fire extinguishers,
                                                              the other fire extinguisher is to be mounted in
                        Fire extinguisher check               the rear underseat storage  compartment
                        As an inboard boat less than 26 feet in length,  (port).
                        your boat must be fitted with one 5-B (B-1)
                        type fire extinguisher when navigating waters
                        controlled by the U.S. Coast Guard. In addi-
                        tion, most state  and local boating laws  re-
                        quire that the craft carry a USCG-approved
                        fire extinguisher whenever the boat is operat-
                        ed.
                        Make  sure at least one fire extinguisher is
                        aboard and full; two fire extinguishers are
                        recommended. See the instructions supplied
                        by the extinguisher  manufacturer to deter-
                        mine the indication of the condition.
                                                              Operating the fire extinguisher
                        A fire extinguisher is not standard equipment
                                                              A chemical-type fire extinguisher may not
                        with this boat. If you do not have a fire extin-
                                                              help when sprayed into the engine compart-
                        guisher, contact your local  Yamaha Boat
                                                              ment through the FIRE-PORT™ because that
                        Dealer  or fire extinguisher dealer for one
                                                              type needs to be aimed directly at the base of
                        meeting the proper specifications.
                                                              the  flames to be  effective. See below for
                                                              FIRE-PORT™ information.
                        Storing the fire extinguisher
                        One fire extinguisher is to be mounted in the
                        driver’s side console compartment. The fire
                        extinguisher recommended for this location
                        is a chemical-type extinguisher with a capac-
                        ity of two pounds or more.







                                                                                             147]]></page><page Index="160"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 148  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              Access port cap check
                                                              Make sure that the access port caps are se-
                                                              curely installed.
                                                              To check the access port caps:
                                                              (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                                                                 113 for information on the rear platform
                                                1                hatch.)
                                                              (2) Make sure that the access port caps are
                                                                 securely installed. If they are removed or
                                                                 are  not locked,  securely install them.
                                                                 (See page 196 for information on the ac-
                        1  FIRE-PORT™
                                                                 cess port caps.)

                                                                                         1












                        A FIRE-PORT™ is mounted below the engine  1  Access port cap
                        hood. Use this port to spray the contents of a
                                                              (3) Close the rear platform hatch.
                        fire extinguisher into the engine compartment
                        if  a fire breaks out in the engine area.
                                                              Jet intake checks
                        WARNING! If there is a fire in the engine
                                                              Carefully check the jet intakes under the boat
                        compartment, opening the hatch will add
                                                              for weeds, debris, or anything else that might
                        more oxygen to the fire, increasing the risk
                                                              restrict the intake of water. If the intakes are
                        of a larger fire or an explosion.
                                                              clogged, cavitation could occur, reducing jet
                        If you see smoke or otherwise suspect a fire,
                                                              thrust, and  possibly damaging  jet pump
                        you can look through the transparent flaps of
                                                              parts.
                        the FIRE-PORT™ to look for signs of flames.
                        If there is a fire, push the nozzle of the fire ex-
                        tinguisher through the FIRE-PORT™ and fol-
                        low the manufacturer’s instructions to empty
                        the contents of the fire extinguisher into the
                        engine compartment.
                        A “clean agent” type fire extinguisher is rec-
                        ommended; a chemical-type fire extinguisher
                        may not be adequate in this application.


                        148]]></page><page Index="161"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 149  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                                                              Engine oil level check
                                                              Make sure that the engine oil level is between
                                                              the minimum level mark and maximum level
                                                              mark on the dipstick. (See page 138 for infor-
                                                              mation on checking the engine oil level.)
                                                              1800 cc engine models

                                   1
                                                                                1

                        1  Jet intake

                        In some cases, the engines may overheat be-
                        cause of a lack of cooling water, and damage
                        could result.  If the jet intakes are clogged,
                        clean them. (See page 196 for information on
                        the jet intakes.) WARNING! Rotating parts  1  Dipstick
                        could cause severe injury or death. Before
                        attempting  to remove weeds or debris
                        from the jet intakes or impeller areas; shut
                        off the engines, remove the main switch
                        keys, and then remove the engine shut-off                     1
                        cord (lanyard) from the  engine shut-off                         2
                        switch.

                        Fuel system checks
                        Check the fuel filler hoses and joints in the
                        engine compartment for damage, loose-
                        ness, and signs of leaking. At least annually,  1  Maximum level mark
                        or if a problem is suspected, check the fuel  2  Minimum level mark
                        tank and fuel filler hoses and clamps. Have
                        a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the fuel tank
                        and fuel filler hoses and clamps. WARNING!
                        If there are signs of leaking fuel, do not
                        operate the boat until the source of the
                        fuel leak is found and corrected. Gasoline
                        and its vapors are highly flammable and
                        explosive.







                                                                                             149]]></page><page Index="162"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 150  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        1900 cc engine models
                                                                                              2
                                                                      2






                         1

                                                                                      1       1

                                                              1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                        1  Dipstick                           2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead

                                                              Bilge water check
                                                              Make sure that no bilge water has collected in
                                                              the engine compartment. If bilge water has
                                                1
                                                   2          collected in the engine compartment drain it.
                                                              (See page 140 for information on draining the
                                                              bilge water.)

                                                              Drain plug check
                                                              Loosen the drain plug and remove them, and
                                                              then make sure that the plug and the O-ring
                        1  Maximum level mark                 on the hull drain plug are not damaged and
                        2  Minimum level mark                 that there is no foreign material on the
                                                              threads or the O-ring on the hull drain plug.
                        Battery check                         NOTICE: Before installing the drain plug,
                        Make sure that the battery terminals are not  clean the  drain plug threads and the  O-
                        damaged and that the battery leads are con-  ring on the hull drain plug to remove any
                        nected properly.  WARNING! The  battery  foreign materials, such as dirt or sand.
                        must always be fully charged and in good  Otherwise, the drain plug could be dam-
                        condition. Loss of battery power may  aged, allowing water to enter the engine
                        leave you stranded. Never  operate the  compartment.  Make sure that the drain
                        boat if the start battery does not have suf-  plug is tightened securely before launch-
                        ficient power to start the engines or if it  ing the boat. Otherwise, water may flood
                        shows any other signs of decreased pow-  the boat and cause it to submerge.
                        er.                                   Securely install the drain plug by tightening it
                                                              until it stop.







                        150]]></page><page Index="163"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 151  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                                                              1900 cc engine models
                                                                 1                  1










                                                  1
                        1  Hull drain plug
                                                              1  Blower
                        Blower checks
                                                              To check the operation using the multi-func-
                             WARNING                          tion display:
                        Gasoline vapors can explode.  Before  Tap  the “Blower” button.  Check that  the
                        starting the engines, check the engine  blowers operate when the button is blue and
                        compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-  that the blowers stop when the button is gray.
                        pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        and then operate the blowers for at least 4
                                                                                     SE
                        minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-  FUEL
                                                                100 %
                        ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline
                        vapors in the  engine compartment or if     19
                                                                           x1000 rpm
                        there are any loose electrical connections.
                        Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a
                                                                   START
                        problem you cannot locate or correct.      13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                        Make sure that the blowers operate properly.
                                                                                  1
                        1800 cc engine models
                                                              1  “Blower” button
                                                  1
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              el:
                         1
                                                              Push the “BLOWER” switch. Check that the
                                                              blowers operate when the switch light is on
                                                              and that the blowers stop when the switch
                                                              light is off.


                        1  Blower





                                                                                             151]]></page><page Index="164"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 152  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        252S                                  Make sure that the bow light and anchor light
                                                              operate properly.
                                                              The procedure for setting up the anchor light
                                                              varies according to the model. See the page
                                                              indicated below for your boat.
                                                    1
                                                              AR250: See page 116.
                                                              SX250: See page 117.
                                                              Except for AR250 / SX250: See page 116.

                                                              TIP:
                                                              SX250: Before operating the boat in daylight
                        1  “BLOWER” switch                    hours after checking the navigation and an-
                                                              chor lights, store the anchor light.
                        252SE / 252SD
                                                              AR250
                                                                         2

                                                    1                                      1








                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                                                              1  Bow light
                        Navigation and anchor lights checks
                                                              2  Anchor light
                             WARNING
                                                              SX250
                         Do not install lights that could be mis-
                          taken for navigation lights.
                                                                         2
                         Do not install lights that could diminish
                          the visibility of  manufacturer installed
                                                                                        1
                          navigation lights or be confused with the
                          manufacturer installed navigation lights.
                         Do not  install lights  that interfere  with
                          the operator’s ability to maintain proper
                          lookout.
                         Do not modify the manufacturer in-
                          stalled navigation lights.
                                                              1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light



                        152]]></page><page Index="165"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 153  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Except for AR250 / SX250              indicator bar to turn the bow light and anchor
                                                              light on or off.
                                            2
                                                              252S / 252SE / 252SD
                                                        1
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              el:
                                                              Push the “NAV LIGHTS” switch. Check that
                                                              only the anchor light or both the anchor light
                                                              and bow light come on when the switch light
                                                              comes on and that both lights go off when the
                                                              switch light is off.
                        1  Bow light                          252S
                        2  Anchor light
                        To check the operation using the multi-func-
                        tion display:
                        (1) Tap the “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                            on the system control screen. Check that
                            the bow light and anchor light come on
                            when the button is  blue and that both
                            lights go off when the button is gray.               1
                        (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                            tem control screen. Check that only the
                            anchor light comes on when the button is  1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                            blue and that the anchor light goes off
                            when the button is gray.          252SE / 252SD
                                           RUNNING MODE
                                 SW
                                                     DEPTH
                                                     .8 9  ft
                                                  19
                                         x1000 rpm
                            H
                                                  HOUSE                          1
                                              9   13.0  V
                                   Nav  Anchor
                                    1    2
                                                              1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                        1  “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                        2  “Anchor” light button
                                                              Horn check
                        TIP:                                  Push the “HORN” switch and check that the
                        You can also tap the navigation light indicator  horn sounds.
                        and the anchor light indicator on the status  The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              operating.


                                                                                             153]]></page><page Index="166"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 154  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        AR250 / SX250                         Engine shut-off cords (lanyards)
                                                              check
                                                              Make sure that the engine shut-off cords (lan-
                               1
                                                              yards) are not damaged. If the cord is dam-
                                                              aged, replace  it.  WARNING! Never  try to
                                        HORN
                                               BILGE
                                                              repair the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) or
                                                              tie  it together.  The engine shut-off cord
                                                              (lanyard) may not pull free when the oper-
                                                              ator falls off, allowing the boat to continue
                                                              to run and cause an accident.

                        1  “HORN” switch
                        252S




                                         1





                                                              Post-launch checks
                                                              Perform the post-launch checks in the pre-
                                                              operation checklist while  the boat  is in  the
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              water and the engines are running.
                        252SE / 252SD




                                          1








                        1  “HORN” switch








                        154]]></page><page Index="167"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 155  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Engine shut-off switch check          Cooling water pilot outlet check
                        Check the engine shut-off switch for proper  Check that water comes out from the pilot
                        operation.                            outlets while the engines are running in the
                        (1) Start the engines. (See page 157 for in-  water. If water is not circulating, something
                            formation on starting the engines.)  may be clogging the intake grates. Refer to
                        (2) Pull the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to  “Jet pump clean-out procedure”  on page
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off  196.
                            switch  to make sure that the engines
                            stop immediately.
                        (3) Make  sure that  the engines cannot be
                            started with the clip removed from the
                            engine shut-off switch.
                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S





                                                 1

                                          2                   TIP:
                                                              It may take up to 20 seconds for water  to
                                                              reach  the pilot  outlets when first  launching
                                                              the boat. The amount and force of the exiting
                                                              water will vary with engine speed.
                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Clip                               NOTICE
                                                              A continuous flow of water from the pilot
                        252SE / 252SD
                                                              outlets shows  that water is  flowing
                                                              through the engine cooling water passag-
                                                              es. If water is not flowing out of the pilot
                                                    1         outlets during operation, do not continue
                                                              to run the engines. Overheating and seri-
                                                              ous damage could occur. (See “Over tem-
                                                    2         perature warning” on pages 73 and 100 for
                                                              more information.)



                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Clip






                                                                                             155]]></page><page Index="168"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 156  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Fuel level check
                        Check the amount of fuel remaining in the
                        fuel tank using the fuel level bar graph on the
                        multi-function display.
                        AR250 / SX250



                                         NW     N      NE
                              FUEL
                              50  %         FLOAT MODE
                          1
                                                    °F
                                             Water Temp
                                 START
                                 11.8  V
                                Bilge  Blower            Nav
                        1  Fuel level bar graph
                        Except for AR250 / SX250
                            1



                                              SE    S
                          FUEL
                          100 %
                              19
                                     x1000 rpm
                                                    MPH
                             START
                             13.0  V  9
                                      Bilge  Blower
                        1  Fuel level bar graph

                        Add fuel if necessary. (See page 136 for infor-
                        mation on filling the fuel tank.)

















                        156]]></page><page Index="169"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 157  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                                Driving your boat
                        Getting to know your boat
                        Operating your boat requires skills acquired
                        through practice over a period of time. Take
                        the time to learn the basic techniques well
                        before attempting more difficult maneuvers.
                        Boating with your new boat can be a very en-
                        joyable activity, providing you with hours of
                        pleasure. But it is essential to familiarize your-
                        self with the operation of the boat to achieve  Always attach the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        the skill necessary to enjoy boating safely.  yard) to your PFD before operating.
                        Before operating this boat, read this own-  You  and all  other passengers must always
                        er’s/operator’s manual, the  Operation  In-  wear a USCG-approved PFD when riding in
                        struction card, and all labels on the boat. Pay  the boat.
                        particular attention to the safety information  Grip the steering wheel firmly and keep both
                        beginning on page 13. These  materials  feet on the deck when driving the boat.
                        should give you an understanding of the boat
                        and its operation. This boat is designed to  Starting the engines
                        carry one operator and up to 11 passengers.   WARNING
                          Maximum load:                       Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   nore any of the following:
                            passengers:                        Before operating your boat, become fa-
                              1180 kg (2600 lb)                miliar  with all controls. Consult a
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  Yamaha Boat Dealer about any control
                            gers:                              or function you do not fully understand.
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 Failure to understand how the controls
                                                               work could cause  an accident or pre-
                                                               vent you from avoiding an accident.
                        Learning to operate your boat
                                                               Gasoline vapors can  explode.  Before
                        Before boating, always perform the pre-oper-
                                                               starting the engines, check the engine
                        ation checks listed on page 144. The short
                                                               compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                        time spent checking the boat will reward you
                                                               pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        with added safety and reliability.
                                                               and then operate the blowers for at least
                        Know and follow  U.S. Coast Guard, state,
                                                               4 minutes. Do not start the engines or
                        and local laws when operating your boat.
                                                               operate the blowers  if  you can  smell
                        Select a wide area to learn in, where visibility
                                                               gasoline vapors in the engine compart-
                        is good and other boat traffic is light. Keep
                                                               ment or if there are any loose electrical
                        the proper distance from other boats and ve-
                                                               connections. Contact a  Yamaha Boat
                        hicles.  Do not operate  where people are
                                                               Dealer if there is a problem you cannot
                        swimming.
                                                               locate or correct.
                                                                                             157]]></page><page Index="170"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 158  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          to your PFD before operating. Failure to
                          attach the cord could  result in a run-
                          away boat if the operator is ejected.
                         Do not apply throttle when anyone is at
                          the rear of the boat. Turn the engines off
                          or keep them at idle. Water and debris
                          exiting the jet thrust nozzles can cause
                          severe injury.
                                                                                       1
                        (1) Always make sure the boat is launched
                            and used in waters that are free from  1  Hull drain plug
                            weeds and  debris,  and at least 90 cm
                                                              (2) Turn the battery switch to the ON posi-
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.
                                                                 tion.
                            WARNING! Never operate in water
                                                              (3) Turn the main switch keys to the on po-
                            that is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep from
                                                                 sition to operate the blowers automati-
                            the bottom of the boat. You increase
                                                                 cally for 5 minutes.
                            your chance of hitting an underwater
                                                              TIP:
                            obstacle. You could be injured. Peb-
                                                              To operate the blowers manually, tap the
                            bles or sand can also be sucked into
                                                              “Blower” button. Ventilate the engine com-
                            the  jet intakes,  damaging the impel-
                                                              partment for at least 4 minutes, and then tap
                            lers.
                                                              the “Blower” button again  to turn  off the
                                                              blowers.
                                                                                     SE
                                                                FUEL
                                                                100 %
                                     90 cm (3 ft)
                                                                    19
                                                                           x1000 rpm
                                                                   START
                                                                   13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                         NOTICE                                                   1

                        There is a hull drain plug at the bottom of  1  “Blower” button
                        the  stern. Check the O-ring on  the  hull
                        drain plug and make sure that the plug is  TIP:
                        tightened securely  before launching the  252S / 252SE / 252SD: You can also push the
                        boat. Otherwise, water may flood the boat  “BLOWER” switch  to ventilate the engine
                        and cause it to submerge.             compartment.





                        158]]></page><page Index="171"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 159  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        252S                                  AR250 / SX250 / 252S


                                                                           1
                                                                     2
                                                    1                               3








                        1  “BLOWER” switch                    1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip
                        252SE / 252SD                         3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)

                                                              252SE / 252SD


                                                    1
                                                                                     3




                                                                         1
                                                                         2
                        1  “BLOWER” switch

                        (4) Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)  1  Engine shut-off switch
                            to your PFD. Install the clip onto the en-  2  Clip
                            gine shut-off switch by pushing the clip  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                            groove over the nut beneath the knob.
                            Be sure the cord is not wrapped around  TIP:
                            the steering wheel or tangled in the con-  The engines will not start when the clip is re-
                            trols.  WARNING! Check  that the en-  moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) is   (5) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                            attached correctly. If the engine shut-  tral position. The starter motors will not
                            off cord (lanyard) is not attached cor-  operate unless the remote control levers
                            rectly, it may not pull free when the  are in neutral.
                            operator falls off, allowing the boat to  (6) AR250 / SX250 / 252S: Turn  the  main
                            continue to run and  cause  an acci-  switch keys to the start position and re-
                            dent.                                lease them when the engines start. If the
                                                                 engines do not start after 5 seconds of
                                                                 cranking, release the keys. Wait at least


                                                                                             159]]></page><page Index="172"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 160  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                            15 seconds before trying to start the en-  gines do not  start after  5 seconds of
                            gines again.                         cranking, release the buttons. Wait at
                                                                 least 15 seconds before trying to start
                                                                 the engines again. NOTICE: If the start-
                                                                 er motors are engaged continuously
                                                                 for more than 5 seconds, the start bat-
                                      HORN
                                             BILGE
                                                                 tery will become quickly discharged
                                                                 and it will be impossible to start the
                                                                 engines. The starter motors may also
                                                                 be damaged if they are engaged con-
                                                                 tinuously for more than 5 seconds.


                         NOTICE

                         Never turn the main switch keys to the
                          start position while the engines are run-
                          ning. The starter mechanisms could be
                          damaged.
                         If the starter motors are engaged con-
                          tinuously for more than 5 seconds, the
                                                                               1
                          start battery will become quickly dis-
                          charged and it will be impossible to start  1  “START/STOP” button
                          the  engines. The starter motors may
                          also be damaged if they are engaged  On this boat, the engines are connected di-
                          continuously for more than 5 seconds.  rectly to the drive units. Starting either engine
                                                              generates some thrust immediately. Only
                        (7) 252SE  / 252SD: Turn  the main  switch
                                                              enough throttle should be applied to keep the
                            key to the on position.
                                                              engine at a fast enough idle to stay running.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Immediately after starting  the engines, the
                                                              engine speed will not increase even if you ap-
                                                              ply the throttle. To increase the engine speed
                                                              after starting the engines, wait a few seconds
                                                              before applying the throttle.



                        (8) 252SE   /   252SD:   Push    the
                            “START/STOP” buttons and  release
                            them when the engines start. If the en-


                        160]]></page><page Index="173"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 161  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        Stopping the engines                  TIP:
                             WARNING                          The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                                              the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                        Once the engines have stopped, you have
                        NO STEERING CONTROL over  the boat.
                                                              (2) Push the “START/STOP” buttons.
                        You could collide with another boat,  a
                        dock, or other obstacle.
                        Stopping the engines immediately after oper-
                        ating at  high  engine speeds is  not recom-
                        mended. Let the engines cool off at idle or
                        low speed for a few minutes first.
                        To stop the engines (AR250 / SX250 / 252S):
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                            neutral position.
                        (2) Turn the main switch keys to the off po-           1
                            sition.                           1  “START/STOP” button

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                      HORN                    the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                                             BILGE
                                                              (3) Turn the main switch key to the off posi-
                                                                 tion.






                        TIP:
                        The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).

                        (3) Remove the main switch keys and the
                            engine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat
                            will be left unattended.          (4) Remove the main switch key and the en-
                                                                 gine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat will
                        To stop the engines (252SE / 252SD):     be left unattended.
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                            neutral position.                 Leaving a dock
                                                              Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                                                              first moves in the direction opposite your de-
                                                              sired turn. It is especially important to under-
                                                              stand this characteristic when leaving a dock.


                                                                                             161]]></page><page Index="174"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 162  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                        If you move the remote control levers to the  higher the engine speed, the more thrust is
                        forward position and simply turn the steering  produced.
                        wheel to steer the bow away from the dock,  The amount of jet thrust, in addition to the po-
                        as you  would when driving a car out of a  sition of the steering wheel, determines how
                        parking space, you will drive the stern of the  sharply you turn.
                        boat into the dock.                   A. More throttle produces high thrust, so
                        The following  steps  are basic maneuvering  the boat will turn more sharply.
                        techniques which can be used in most cir-
                        cumstances:                           A
                        (1) With the engines idling and the bow still
                            moored to the dock, turn the steering
                            wheel toward the dock. Moving the re-
                            mote control levers into the TDE position
                            or forward position will start to move the
                            stern of the boat away from the dock.
                        (2) When the stern is out a few feet, release
                            the bow  mooring, and then turn  the
                            steering wheel to the center position or
                                                              B. Less throttle produces low thrust, so the
                            away from the dock. Move the remote
                                                                 boat will turn more gradually.
                            control levers into  the reverse  position
                            and move away from the dock.      B
                        Turning the boat
                             WARNING
                         Do not pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle when trying to steer away
                          from objects — you need throttle to
                          steer.
                         Be sure passengers are holding on be-
                          fore making turns. An unprepared pas-  C. Pulling the remote control levers back to
                          senger could lose balance and fall.    idle or the neutral position produces only
                                                                 minimum thrust. If you are traveling  at
                        Steering control depends on the combination
                                                                 speeds above trolling, you will have rap-
                        of steering wheel position and the amount of
                                                                 idly decreasing ability  to steer without
                        throttle.
                                                                 throttle. You may still have some turning
                        Water sucked in through the intake grates is
                                                                 ability immediately after pulling the re-
                        pressurized by the impellers in the jet pumps.
                                                                 mote control levers back to  idle, but
                        As the pressurized water is expelled from the
                                                                 when the engines slow down, the boat
                        pumps through the jet thrust nozzles, it cre-
                                                                 will no longer respond to steering wheel
                        ates thrust to move and steer the boat. The
                                                                 input until you apply throttle again or you
                                                                 reach a trolling speed.
                        162]]></page><page Index="175"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 163  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                            At trolling speed, the boat can be turned  Turning left
                            gradually by steering wheel  position
                            alone using  just the  amount of thrust
                            available at engine idle.
                         C








                                                              Turning right



                        D. If the boat is moving and the remote con-
                            trol levers are in the neutral position, or if
                            there is no thrust because  the engines
                            are stopped, the  boat will  go  straight
                            even though the steering wheel is turned.
                            You need throttle to steer.

                         D

                                                              Boating with passengers
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              When  passengers are on board,  make
                                                              sure they are seated and holding onto the
                                                              handgrips, handrails, or straps before you
                                                              start  to accelerate. An  unprepared pas-
                                                              senger could lose balance and fall.
                                                              Your boat is designed for one operator and
                                                              up to 11 passengers only. Never have more
                                                              than 12 people in the boat. Passengers must
                                                              sit in one of the seats and hold onto the hand-
                                                              grips. Passengers should sit so the weight in
                                                              the boat is balanced from side-to-side and
                                                              bow-to-stern as much as possible. If the pas-
                                                              senger seat in front of the helm is used, be
                                                              sure  the operator’s  view ahead is not ob-
                                                              structed.


                                                                                             163]]></page><page Index="176"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 164  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                                                              The stopping distance varies depending on
                          Maximum load:
                                                              gross weight, water surface conditions, and
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and
                                                              wind direction. The stated straight-line stop-
                            passengers:
                                                              ping distance should be used for a reference.
                              1180 kg (2600 lb)
                                                              The boat slows down as soon as the remote
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              control levers are returned to idle but will
                            gers:
                                                              coast for a distance before fully stopping. If
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                              you are not sure you can stop in time before
                                                              hitting an obstacle, apply throttle and turn in
                        Stopping the boat                     another direction.
                                                              1800 cc engine models
                             WARNING
                                                              AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE
                         Allow adequate stopping distance.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and   123 m (403 ft)
                          keep a safe distance away from people,
                          objects, and other boats to give you time
                          to stop.
                         Do not shut the engines off when slow-
                          ing down in case you need engine power
                          to steer away from a boat or other ob-
                          stacle that comes into your path.   1900 cc engine models
                         You will lose steering control if you com-  AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE / 252SD
                          pletely  pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle. You need throttle to steer.
                         Do not use the reverse function to slow
                          down or stop the boat  from planing      138 m (453 ft)
                          speed as it could cause you to lose con-
                          trol, be ejected, or impact the steering
                          wheel or other  parts of the boat.  This
                          could increase the risk of serious injury.
                        The boat is  not equipped  with  a separate
                        braking system. It is stopped by water resis-
                        tance after the remote control levers are  Boarding from the water
                        moved back to idle. The stopping distance is
                        different depending on the model.         WARNING
                        1800 cc engine models:                To avoid severe injury or  death, do  not
                         123 m (403 ft)                       board from the rear, use swim platform, or
                        1900 cc engine models:                swim behind boat if the engines are run-
                         138 m (453 ft)                       ning.


                        164]]></page><page Index="177"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 165  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                         Severe internal injuries can occur if wa-  (2) Sit in one of the seats provided and put
                          ter is forced into body cavities as a re-  both feet on the deck.
                          sult of being near the jet thrust nozzles.
                         Exhaust gases coming from underneath  Docking
                          the swim platform contain carbon mon-  (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                          oxide, a colorless, odorless gas which  swimmers are close to the boat. Come to
                          may cause brain damage or death when   a stop before you reach the dock.
                          inhaled. Symptoms include nausea, diz-  (2) Notice how wind and water currents are
                          ziness, and drowsiness.                affecting boat movement as you attach
                                                                 your mooring lines and fenders.
                        (1) Be sure the  engines are  off,  and then
                                                              (3) Approach the dock at idle speed. Use re-
                            move to the stern of the boat.
                                                                 verse as necessary during slow-speed
                        (2) Pull out the stern  ladder  and  climb up
                                                                 maneuvering to help control speed and
                            onto the swim platform. (See page 120
                                                                 direction. Position the boat according to
                            for information on the stern ladder.)
                                                                 wind and water conditions. WARNING!
                                                                 Do not use your hand, arm, or other
                                                                 parts of your body to try to keep the
                                                                 boat from hitting the dock. You could
                                                                 be injured if the boat pushes against
                                                                 the dock.

                                                              Wind or current pushing boat away from
                                                              dock:
                                                              Slowly approach the dock at about a 45° an-
                                                              gle. Secure the bow to the dock, and then
                        (3) Return the stern ladder to the stowed po-  use engine thrust or a boat hook to gently
                            sition, and then sit in one of the seats  move the stern to the dock.
                            provided.
                                                                            Wind or current
                        Boarding from the bow
                        A bow ladder is available when boarding from
                        the bow of the boat is desired, when the boat
                        is beached. (See page 119 for bow ladder us-
                        ing procedures.)

                        Boarding from a dock or landing jetty
                        (1) Board the boat from the side. One per-
                            son should board at a time by stepping  Wind or current pushing boat toward
                            into the boat. Never jump in. Avoid step-  dock:
                            ping on slick gelcoat  surfaces  on  the  Slowly maneuver to a shallow angle and al-
                            boat’s gunwales, especially if wet.  low the boat to move toward the dock.



                                                                                             165]]></page><page Index="178"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 166  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                                                              Beaching
                                                              NOTICE
                                 Wind or current
                                                               Small pebbles, sand, seaweed, and oth-
                                                               er debris can be sucked into the jet in-
                                                               takes and  impair or  damage the
                                                               impellers. Always stop the engines be-
                                                               fore beaching the boat. Be sure the boat
                                                               is in water 90 cm (3 ft) deep from the
                                                               bottom  of the boat  before starting the
                                                               engines again.
                        No wind or current:                    Do not beach the boat on rocky beach-
                        Approach the dock at a shallow angle. Se-
                                                               es. The hull gelcoat and exposed pump
                        cure the bow to the dock, and then use en-
                                                               housings can be damaged.
                        gine thrust or a boat hook to gently move the
                                                               Pay attention to shifts in tides. Beaching
                        stern to the dock.
                                                               at high tide may make it impossible to
                                                               re-launch the boat if the tide recedes.
                        To dock using the DRiVE X mode (252SD):
                        Move the remote control levers to the neutral  (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                        position, and then  activate the DRiVE X  swimmers are near the beach.
                        mode. (See page 84.)                  (2) Approach the beach slowly and stop the
                        Pull the throttle/shift paddle (right) to move  engines when the water is about 90 cm
                        the boat forward or pull the throttle/shift pad-  (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.
                        dle (left) to move the boat in reverse at a slow  Remember: turning is  impossible with
                        speed and dock the boat.                 the engines stopped.
                                                              (3) Get out of the boat and pull the bow up
                                                                 on the beach.
                                              1
                                                              (4) When leaving the beach, push the boat
                                                                 out into water that is at least 90 cm (3 ft)
                                                                 deep from the bottom of the boat before
                               2
                                                                 starting the engines.





                        1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                        2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)









                        166]]></page><page Index="179"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 167  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        Anchoring                             (6) If the anchor is stuck on the bottom, try
                                                                 this: Let out a few feet of anchor line and
                             WARNING
                                                                 secure the line to the boat, again. Slowly
                        Always anchor from the bow. Anchoring    maneuver the boat around the  anchor
                        from  the stern will  make the boat un-  until the anchor pulls loose. Keep the line
                        steady. A strong current can pull a stern-  taut during this procedure.
                        anchored boat underwater.
                                                              Crossing wakes and swells
                        Select an  anchor appropriate for your boat
                                                              You will not always have flat, smooth water.
                        and water conditions. A “Danforth” (or fluke)
                                                              There will be  swells and wakes  from other
                        type anchor is suitable for most applications;
                                                              boats, etc.
                        your  Yamaha Boat Dealer can help you
                                                              The best way to cross wakes and swells is
                        choose an anchor.
                                                              with the least jolt to you and the boat. Small
                        (1) Make sure the anchor line is securely tied
                                                              swells are not as difficult to cross as larger
                            to the anchor and to the bow eye or a
                                                              swells or wakes. Crossing a sharp wake gives
                            bow cleat.
                                                              more of a jolt than a broad swell.
                        (2) Move the  boat to  the spot where  you
                            want to lower the anchor, heading the
                            boat into the wind or current. Stop the
                            boat, and then lower the anchor until it
                            hits bottom.
                        (3) While keeping tension on the line, slowly    Sharp wakes
                            back up the boat until you have let out
                            line that is 4–6 times the depth of the wa-
                            ter. For example, if you are anchoring in
                            10 feet of water, let out 40–60 feet of line.  Broad swell
                            Secure the line.
                        (4) Pull on the line to be sure the anchor is
                            holding.  Also, periodically check  your
                            boat’s position against the shoreline to
                            make sure it is not drifting and dragging
                            the anchor. Reset if necessary.
                        (5) To pull in (“weigh”) the anchor, start the
                            engines and move forward, keeping ten-
                            sion on the line as you pull it in. When the
                            anchor line is straight up and down, pull
                            hard to lift the anchor from the bottom
                            material.








                                                                                             167]]></page><page Index="180"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 168  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Operation

                        To cross a wake or swell, change your speed  Post-operation checks
                        and choose the angle at which you cross the  These post-operation procedures are devel-
                        wake or swell. Usually, a slower speed and  oped to help preserve the long-term appear-
                        “quartering” the wake (crossing at an angle)  ance and reliability of your boat. Perform
                        will reduce the jolt.                 these procedures as soon as possible after
                        Two other things you may notice. The first is  the boat is loaded back on the trailer after the
                        that crossing a group of wakes or swells is  day’s use.
                        not as easy or smooth as crossing just one  Some owners prefer to moor their boat sea-
                        wake. The second is that when you quarter  sonally, rather than keeping it on the trailer
                        the wake or swell, the boat will try to steer  between uses.  Extended mooring  is not
                        away from the wake or swell. When crossing  recommended by Yamaha, but can  be
                        at a 45° angle, you may not notice this, but at  performed if proper precautions are taken
                        a smaller angle, say 10°, it can be very strong.  to help guard against prolonged environ-
                        Be prepared to steer and balance as neces-  mental exposure and  marine  growth.
                        sary.                                 Proper flushing of the cooling system on
                                                              each engine is not possible with the boat in
                            Wake
                                                              the water. In addition, conditions  such  as
                                                              stray electrical voltage in the water, marine
                                                              organisms, and saltwater corrosion can ad-
                                                              versely affect the life of many boat compo-
                                                              nents.  NOTICE: Leaving the  boat in the
                                                              water for extended periods will accelerate
                            90˚
                                                              the rate of normal deterioration of the ex-
                                      45˚                     posed drive components.
                                                10˚           If you do decide to moor your boat, be sure to
                                                              remove it from the water periodically to clean
                                                              the hull and jet pump areas. The frequency of
                                                              maintenance required will depend upon
                                                              whether the water is salt water or fresh water
                                                              and other local water conditions. See your
                                                              dealer for additional  preventative mainte-
                                                              nance recommendations on mooring and/or
                                                              saltwater use for your area.
                                                              (1) After putting the boat on the trailer, flush
                                                                 the cooling system on each  engine to
                                                                 prevent the cooling  system from  clog-
                                                                 ging up with salt, sand, or dirt. Refer to
                                                                 page 174 for the cooling system flushing
                                                                 procedure.
                                                              (2) Drain residual water from the exhaust
                                                                 system by starting the engine, and then


                        168]]></page><page Index="181"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 169  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                            alternately pushing the remote control le-  (9) Reinstall the hull drain plug.  NOTICE:
                            ver up to half throttle and back to idle for  Tighten the hull drain  plug  securely
                            10 to 15 seconds. NOTICE: Do not run  before launching the boat. Otherwise,
                            the engine over 4000 r/min on land. Al-  water may flood the boat and cause it
                            so, do not run the  engine for more  to submerge. Clean any foreign mate-
                            than 15 seconds  without supplying   rial, such as dirt or sand, from the
                            water, otherwise, the  engine  could  threads  and the O-ring on the hull
                            overheat and/or seize.               drain plug before installing the drain
                        (3) Stop the engine.                     plug.
                        (4) Wash down the hull, helm, and both jet  (10) Spray a rust inhibitor, such as Yamaha
                            drive units with fresh water.        Silicone Protectant and Lubricant, on
                        (5) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page  metallic parts to minimize corrosion.
                            113 for rear platform hatch opening and  (11) Use a boat cover designed for your boat,
                            closing procedures.)                 or store the boat in a building or under a
                        (6) Remove the access port caps to let any  canopy or carport in order to prevent rain
                            water  drain that  has pooled on  them.  from falling onto the boat. Because all of
                            (See page 196 for access port cap re-  the water will not be drained from the
                            moval and installation procedures.) If the  deck automatically, take sufficient mea-
                            boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,  sures to prevent rainwater from entering
                            leave the caps out until you prepare to  the boat. NOTICE: Make sure that the
                            launch the boat again. If the boat will be  turnbuckles on the boat cover do not
                            transported on the trailer any distance,  contact the boat directly when using
                            temporarily reinstall the caps and close  the cover. Otherwise, the boat could
                            the hatch until you get home. Open the  be damaged.
                            hatch again when you arrive and remove  (12) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            the caps as before. Leave the caps loose  position. (See page 39 for more informa-
                            until you plan to transport the boat on the  tion.)
                            trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                            cess port caps out when you are not
                            using or transporting the boat helps
                            keep them from becoming stuck in the
                            access ports.
                        (7) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                            140.)
                        (8) Rinse the engine compartment with a
                            small amount of fresh water. Be careful
                            not to get water on the air filter area or
                            electrical components. Allow any water
                            in the bilge to drain out. After the water
                            has drained, wipe the engine compart-
                            ment and bilge with dry rags.



                                                                                             169]]></page><page Index="182"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 170  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trailering

                                Trailering the boat           Use safety chains between the towing vehicle
                                                              and the trailer so the trailer will not detach
                             WARNING
                                                              completely from the towing vehicle if it acci-
                        Avoid accident and injury from improper  dentally comes loose from the hitch ball.
                        trailering:                           Crisscross the chains under the trailer tongue
                         The  trailer must be matched  for  the  so the tongue will not hit the road surface if it
                          boat’s weight and hull.             falls loose. Rig the chains as tightly as possi-
                         The towing vehicle must have the ca-  ble while allowing just enough slack to permit
                          pacity of pulling the load. Pulling a load  tight turns.
                          that exceeds the towing capacity may  Be sure the tongue weight (vertical weight on
                          cause loss of control.              the hitch point) is correct. Generally, 5% to
                         Be sure the boat is secured to the trailer  10% of the combined weight of the boat and
                          and the trailer is properly hitched to the  trailer should be on the tongue. Too much or
                          towing vehicle before towing.       too little weight can cause difficult steering or
                         Read the manuals supplied with the  trailer swaying.
                          trailer by the manufacturer.
                                                              Trailering checklist
                        A trailer is provided as standard equipment
                                                               Check your state laws to be sure your trail-
                        with your boat. If you need to obtain another
                                                               er meets all regulations, such as proper li-
                        trailer, choose one that  is manufactured  to
                                                               censing, brake, axle load, and safety chain
                        carry a boat of the size and weight of your
                                                               requirements.
                        boat. Check the certification label on the left
                                                               Check the trailer for any loose fasteners or
                        forward side of the trailer. This label  is  re-
                                                               damaged parts.
                        quired to show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
                                                               Check the tires for proper inflation.
                        ing (GVWR), which is the load carrying
                                                               Check the wheel bearings and wheel lug
                        capacity of the trailer plus the trailer’s weight.
                                                               nuts before each trip.
                        Be sure that the total weight of your boat, any
                                                               Check the tail, brake, and turn signal lights
                        cargo, and the trailer weight itself does not
                                                               for proper operation.
                        exceed the GVWR.
                        Hitch
                        The trailer hitch ball must match the size of
                        the socket on the trailer hitch coupler. Hitch-
                        es are divided into classes that specify the
                        Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and the maxi-
                        mum tongue weight. Always use a hitch rated
                        for the same or higher class. Use a bolted-on
                        or welded-on hitch; clamp-on bumper hitch-
                        es are not recommended. Be sure the trailer
                        hitch’s release handle is latched with the lock
                        pin installed before towing.



                        170]]></page><page Index="183"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 171  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                         Secure the bow of the boat to the trailer   Be sure any cargo that must be carried in
                          with the winch line and also with the chain.  the boat as well as the folding windshield
                          Secure the stern eyes to the trailer with tie-  and all hatches are  secured. A durable,
                          downs.                               properly fitting cover, such as the genuine
                                                               Yamaha cover available from your Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer designed specifically for your
                                                               boat, is highly recommended to help pro-
                                                               tect your boat  during  transport and stor-
                                                               age.
                                                               Carry a spare tire for the trailer, along with
                                                               sufficient tools to change the tire.
                                                               While traveling, check the wheel hubs on
                                                   1           the trailer whenever you park. If a hub feels
                                                               abnormally hot, have the bearing inspected
                                                               before continuing your trip. On longer trips,
                        1  Bow eye
                                                               it is a good idea to carry a set of spare
                                                               wheel bearings, seals, and races.
                                                               When making a turn, do not cut corners.
                                                               The trailer has a smaller turning circle, so it
                                                               turns more sharply around the corner than
                                                               the towing vehicle.

                                                              Backing your trailer
                                                              It takes practice to back a trailer successfully.
                                         1
                                                              If you are not familiar backing up with a trailer,
                                                              practice first in an open area away from ob-
                        1  Stern eye
                                                              stacles.
                         Take down and store  the  bimini top,  if
                          used. The bimini top is not designed to stay
                          unsecured on the boat at highway speeds.
                          (See page 131 or 135.)
                        TIP:
                        During transport, use a boat cover to prevent
                        any items from blowing out of the boat, or
                        make sure to store any items inside the stor-
                        age compartments and securely close the
                        compartments.
                         Be sure the access port caps are properly
                          installed (see page 196 for more informa-
                          tion) and the rear platform hatch is closed
                          securely.


                                                                                             171]]></page><page Index="184"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 172  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trailering

                        Keep the following points in mind when   sible, have a second person stand aside
                        backing up                               as an observer. Stop when  the wheels
                         Back slowly. Make steering adjustments in  are at least halfway submerged. Set the
                          small steps.                           parking brake.
                         Turn the towing vehicle’s wheels opposite  (5) Remove the bow line from the bow eye.
                          the direction you want the trailer to go.  (6) Back the trailer farther into the water until
                         After the trailer begins moving, turn the  just the tops of the  fenders  show, and
                          towing vehicle to follow it.           then reset the parking brake. Board the
                         Have a second person stand by to help di-  boat and start it. If possible, remain on
                          rect you with hand signals.            the trailer until the engines are warm and
                                                                 are responding to throttle.
                        Launching                             (7) Back the boat out into the water, watch-
                        As a courtesy to other boaters, prepare your  ing carefully for people, other boats, or
                        boat for launching before using the ramp.  obstacles.
                        Each launch may have particular differences,
                        such as ramp angle, prevailing wind, waves,  Loading
                        and water currents. If possible, watch a cou-  (1) Disconnect the trailer  lights from the
                        ple of boaters launch their boats first to notice  towing vehicle.
                        any problems. While every boater develops a  (2) Back the trailer down the ramp as close
                        preferred launch procedure, here is a recom-  to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-
                        mended general procedure:                sible, have a second person act as an
                                                                 observer while standing to the side of the
                                                                 trailer. Stop when the tops of the trailer’s
                                                                 fenders are  about  3 inches above  the
                                                                 waterline.
                                                              (3) With the boat moving at the slowest idle
                                                                 speed, guide the boat onto the support
                                                                 rails. Use throttle only if necessary for
                                                                 steering ability.  WARNING! Using too
                                                                 much throttle  can cause the boat to
                                                                 jump  over the front of  the trailer,
                        (1) Perform the pre-operation checks     which can result in injury to the boat
                            shown on page 144 that can be per-   operator and bystanders.
                            formed on land.                   (4) Make sure the boat is centered on the
                        (2) Remove all trailering tie-down lines from  support rails and is headed straight for
                            the boat and attach your docking lines  the bow stop (bumper board). Ease the
                            and fenders, if used.                boat forward until the bow rests against
                        (3) Disconnect the trailer  lights  from the  the bow stop. NOTICE: The winch line
                            towing vehicle.                      is not designed to pull the boat onto
                        (4) Back the trailer down the ramp as close  the trailer.
                            to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-



                        172]]></page><page Index="185"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 173  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                        (5) Attach and  tighten the  winch line.  Lifting
                            NOTICE: The winch line should not be  NOTICE
                            the only line securing the bow during
                            trailering. Use the chain along with the  Do not attach lifting cables to the bow eye,
                            winch to secure the boat to the trailer.  cleats, stern eyes, ski tow hook, or hand-
                                                              grips. Serious damage to the boat can oc-
                                                              cur. Use only a sling designed specifically
                                                              for lifting boats.
                                                              If you need to remove the boat from the water
                                                              without a trailer, use these guidelines:
                                                               Use a sling-type lifting  mechanism  de-
                                                               signed for lifting boats. The sling should be
                                                               covered with a protective material to pre-
                                                   1
                                                               vent damage to the hull gelcoat.
                                                               Use spreader bars to avoid side stress to
                        1  Bow eye                             the hull that may cause cracks in the gel-
                                                               coat and fiberglass.
                        (6) Pull the trailer up the ramp out of the way   Attach guidelines to the bow eye and stern
                            of other boaters. Attach the bow and  eyes to control movement of the boat dur-
                            stern tie-downs. Reconnect the trailer  ing lifting.
                            lights.                            Remove all people and all cargo from the
                                                               boat. Drain any excess water from the bilge
                                                               using the bilge pump.
                                                               Be sure all people are standing clear, and
                                                               then lift the boat slowly and just far enough
                                                               to verify that the boat is securely held and
                                                               properly balanced. If necessary, lower the
                                                               boat again and adjust the slings.
                                                               When ready, lift the boat slowly and care-
                                         1                     fully.

                        1  Stern eye
                        (7) Perform the post-operation checks  on
                            page 168.











                                                                                             173]]></page><page Index="186"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 174  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Care and storage

                               Post-operation care            (3) Connect the garden hose to a water tap.
                        Flushing the cooling system           (4) Make sure that the area around the boat
                        Cooling system flushing is essential to pre-  is clear, and then start the engine. Imme-
                        vent the cooling system from  clogging up  diately after the engine starts, fully turn
                        with salt, sand, or dirt.                the water supply on so that water flows
                        (1) Connect the garden hose adapter to a  out continually from the jet thrust nozzle
                            garden hose.                         and cooling water pilot outlet. NOTICE:
                                                                 Never turn on the water before start-
                                                                 ing the engine. The water could flow
                                1                2               back through the muffler into the
                                                                 crankcase causing  severe engine
                                                                 damage. Be sure to turn on the water
                                                                 immediately after starting the engine
                                                                 to prevent engine overheating.
                                                              (5) Run the engine at a fast idle for 3 to 5
                                                                 minutes. If the engine stops while flush-
                                                                 ing, turn the water supply off immediately
                                                                 and perform  the procedure  again from
                        1  Garden hose adapter
                                                                 step 4.
                        2  Garden hose
                                                              (6) Turn off the water supply, and then drain
                        (2) Loosen the flush hose connector cap for  residual water from the exhaust system
                            the engine you are going to flush and re-  by alternately pushing the remote control
                            move it. Insert the garden hose adapter  lever up to half throttle and back to idle
                            into the flush hose connector by pushing  for 10 to 15 seconds.
                            and twisting it until it is securely connect-  (7) Stop the engine. NOTICE: Never have
                            ed.                                  the water on when the engine is not
                                                                 running. The water  could  flow back
                            1                                    through the muffler into the crankcase
                                              3                  causing severe engine damage. Do
                                                                 not run the engine for more than 15
                                                                 seconds  after the water supply  has
                                2
                                                                 been turned off to avoid engine over-
                                                                 heating.
                                                              (8) Remove the garden hose adapter.
                                                              (9) Install and tighten the cap securely.
                                                              (10) Repeat  the flushing procedure for  the
                                                                 other engine.



                        1  Flush hose connector
                        2  Flush hose connector cap
                        3  Garden hose adapter


                        174]]></page><page Index="187"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 175  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Cleaning the boat                        water when rinsing the engine or en-
                                                                 gine  compartment as severe engine
                             WARNING
                                                                 damage could result.
                        Gasoline and its vapors are highly flamma-  (4) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        ble and explosive. If there is fuel or a fu-  113 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        el/water  mixture   in  the   engine     closing procedures.)
                        compartment, wipe it up immediately with  (5) Remove the access port caps to let any
                        dry rags. Do not operate the boat until the  water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        source of the fuel leak is found and cor-  (See page 196 for access port cap re-
                        rected.                                  moval and installation procedures.) If the
                                                                 boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                         NOTICE                                  leave the caps out until you prepare to

                        Incorrect cleaning can damage vinyl. See  launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                        “Basic stain guide” on page 177, and  "Chil  transported on the trailer any distance,
                        Cool Technology  vinyl upholstery  Clean-  temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                        ing & Care" on page 178.                 the hatch until you get home. Open the
                                                                 hatch again when you arrive and remove
                        (1) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                                                                 the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                            140 for hull drain plug removal and instal-
                                                                 until you plan to transport the boat on the
                            lation procedures.)
                                                                 trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                                                                 cess port caps out when you are not
                                                                 using or transporting the boat helps
                                                                 keep them from becoming stuck in the
                                                                 access ports. (See page 196 for more
                                                                 information.)
                                                              (6) Securely install  the hull drain plug by
                                                                 tightening it until it stops. NOTICE: Be-
                                                                 fore installing the hull drain plug, clean
                                                                 the drain plug threads and O-ring to
                                                  1              remove any foreign materials, such as
                        1  Hull drain plug                       dirt or sand. Otherwise, the hull drain
                                                                 plug could be damaged, allowing wa-
                        (2) Clean the  hull, boat  interior, and  drive  ter to enter the hull. Check the O-ring
                            units with a mild natural soap and water.  on the hull drain plug and make sure
                            Rinse with fresh water.              that the hull drain plug is tightened se-
                        (3) Clean the engine and bilge areas with a  curely before launching the boat. Oth-
                            mild natural soap and  rinse with fresh  erwise, water may flood the boat and
                            water. Drain all water and wipe up any re-  cause it to submerge.
                            maining moisture with clean, dry rags.  (7) Spray the exterior of the engines with
                            NOTICE: Be careful not to get water  Yamalube Silicone Protectant  &  Lubri-
                            on the air filter area or electrical com-  cant, or an equivalent.
                            ponents.  Do not use high-pressure

                                                                                             175]]></page><page Index="188"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 176  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Care and storage

                        (8) Wax the hull with or other non-abrasive
                            wax designed for marine gelcoat.
                            WARNING! Slippery surfaces can
                            cause falls and injury. Be careful not to
                            apply too much wax on deck and gun-
                            wale stepping surfaces. This will make
                            them slippery.
                        (9) Wipe  all vinyl and  rubber components,
                            such as the seats and engine compart-
                            ment seals, with a quality vinyl protec-
                            tant.  NOTICE: Some  well-known
                            “protectant” products on the market
                            can actually damage vinyl over time.
                            Consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer for de-
                            tails.
                        (10) Vacuum and hose-off the carpeting as
                            necessary. If needed, use  a quality
                            brand-name carpet  cleaner product  to
                            clean soiled areas. NOTICE: Always dry
                            the carpet face up. Never roll up the
                            carpet. Never fold the carpet.
                        (11) Wash the fabric of the bimini top with a
                            mild natural soap in lukewarm water,
                            then rinse. Do not use detergents. Allow
                            to air dry thoroughly before storage.



























                        176]]></page><page Index="189"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 177  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Basic stain guide
                        Here are basic steps to remove common stains from boat upholstery. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or upholstery-cleaning professional for difficult stains.
                        TIP:
                        The basic stain guide does not apply to Chil Cool Technology vinyl. See page 178 for cleaning
                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl.
                         TYPE OF STAIN                 STEPS
                                                       (rinse with clean, warm water and then dry after application)
                                                             1             2             3
                         General care/Dirt                   A             B             —
                         Chewing gum                         E             A             —
                         Coffee/Tea/Chocolate                B             —             —
                         Grease                              E             B             —
                         Ink*                                C             F             D
                         Ketchup                             A             B             —
                         Lipstick                            C             B             A
                         Mustard                             A             B             C
                         Mildew/Wet leaves*                  C             B             A
                         Motor oil                           B             —             —
                         Permanent marker*                   C             F             D
                         Suntan lotion*                      A             B             —
                         Tar/Asphalt                         E             B             —
                        * May cause permanent staining.

                               A       Medium-soft brush with warm, soapy water
                               B       Mild natural soap
                               C       Isopropyl alcohol (91% is best)
                                       Mixture of 1 tablespoon (15 ml) ammonia, 1/4 cup (60 ml) hydrogen peroxide, and
                               D
                                       3/4 cup (177 ml) water
                               E       Wipe or scrape off excess (chill gum with ice first)
                               F       Name brand ink remover















                                                                                             177]]></page><page Index="190"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 178  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Care and storage

                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl upholstery   (3) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead
                        Cleaning & Care                          (red).
                        Chil Cool Technology  vinyl  upholstery is a  (4) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-
                        new material that is cooler to the touch than  move the battery from the boat.
                        standard marine vinyl.
                        Easy care is required to maintain its longevity  2  3                 2
                        and cooling properties.                                 4
                        (1) Mix a solution 30:1, (30 parts warm water
                            and 1 part mild NON-BLEACH liquid dish
                            soap).
                        (2) Apply and rub with a soft damp cloth.
                        (3) Rinse with clean warm water and wipe
                            dry.                                                              1
                        Do use these or similar cleaners                               1
                         Mild NON-bleach soap & water        1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                         409 ®                               2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Mild Soap Sauce         3  Ground lead (black)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Vinyl Sauce             4  Battery strap
                         Babes™ Seat Soap
                                                              To store the battery:
                        Do not use these or similar cleaners  (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals
                         NO 303 ®                               using a mixture of baking soda and water
                         NO Starbrite ®                         (one tablespoon of baking soda to one
                         NO Meguiar’s ®                         cup of water).
                         NO Fantastic ®                      (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly
                         NO eraser sponges                      to the  battery terminals and to all ex-
                                                                 posed connectors.
                        Failure to care for your vinyl properly or use of  (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer
                        improper cleaners will damage your vinyl.  period, check its state of charge (use a
                                                                 hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-
                        Battery care                             ter) at least once a month and recharge
                        If the boat will not be used for more than a  the battery if it gets too low.
                        month, remove the battery and store it in a
                        cool, dark place.                     To charge the battery:
                        The battery is located in the engine compart-  (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-
                        ment.                                    tilled  water if necessary  to top up  the
                        To remove the battery:                   electrolyte to the proper level.
                        (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF posi-  (2) Follow  the battery manufacturer’s  in-
                            tion. (See page 39.)                 structions for charging.  WARNING!
                        (2) Disconnect the ground lead (black) and  When charging a battery, keep it well
                            the negative (–) battery lead (black).  away from sparks and open flames, as



                        178]]></page><page Index="191"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 179  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                            it gives off explosive gases. When us-   Long-term storage
                            ing a battery charger, connect the bat-  Storing your boat for prolonged periods of
                            tery to the charger before you turn on  time, such as winter storage in freezing tem-
                            the charger. This will prevent sparking  perature, requires preventative maintenance
                            at the terminals that could ignite bat-  to ensure against deterioration. It is advisable
                            tery gases.                       to have the boat serviced by an authorized
                        To install the battery:               Yamaha Boat Dealer before storage. Howev-
                        (1) Place the battery  in  the battery holder,  er, the  following procedures can be per-
                            and then fasten the battery using the bat-  formed by the owner with a minimum of tools.
                            tery strap.
                        (2) Connect the positive (+) battery lead (red)  Fuel system
                            to the  positive (+) battery terminal.  Fill the fuel tank with fresh fuel, adding one
                            NOTICE: Reversal of the battery leads  ounce of Fuel Med RX, available from your
                            will damage the electrical parts.  Yamaha Boat Dealer, to each gallon of fuel or
                        (3) Connect the  negative (–)  battery lead  use an equivalent according to the manufac-
                            (black) and the ground lead (black) to the  ture’s instructions. (See page 136 for infor-
                            negative (–) battery terminal.    mation on filling the fuel tank.) Do not “top
                        (4) Make sure that the battery is securely  off” the tank, because fuel could spill. A full
                            held in place.                    fuel tank is less likely to allow condensation
                                                              to collect in the tank, reducing the chance of
                                                              contaminated fuel. Running the engines with
                                                              treated fuel during  cooling system flushing
                                                              will also help protect the fuel system.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Use of Fuel Med RX eliminates the need to
                                                              drain the fuel system. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                                                              Dealer or other qualified mechanic if the fuel
                                                              system is to be drained instead.

                                                              Lubrication
                                                              It is advisable to take the boat to a Yamaha
                                                              Boat Dealer to have the engines fogged for
                                                              long-term storage.

                                                              Grease points
                                                              To keep moving parts sliding or rotating
                                                              smoothly, coat them  with water-resistant
                                                              grease.







                                                                                             179]]></page><page Index="192"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 180  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Care and storage


                          Recommended water-resistant grease:
                            YAMALUBE  MARINE GREASE or
                            Yamalube Grease A


                         Throttle cables (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)
                        Grease the throttle-cable inner wires at the
                        pulley wheel of each APS.
                        1800 cc engine models


                                                               Pivot points
                                                              Grease all pivot points  of the  steering and
                                                              shift mechanisms at the pump ends.









                        1900 cc engine models






                                                               Bearing housings
                                                              Grease  the bearing housings through  the
                                                              grease nipples.  NOTICE:  Fill the grease
                                                              slowly and carefully, because it can dam-
                                                              age the hoses and the joints.
                                                              The first  service should  be done after  10
                                                              hours or 1 month by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                         Steering cable ball joints and inner wires
                                                              Fill the bearing housings with water-resistant
                        Grease the steering cable and shift cable ball
                                                              grease through the grease nipples.
                        joints at the jet thrust nozzles. Extend the
                        steering cable and shift cable inner wires and  Grease capacity:
                        apply a thin coat of grease to them.      33.0–35.0 cc (1.11–1.18 oz)
                                                              After  first service:  Every 100 hours  or 6
                                                              months (you may do this yourself).




                        180]]></page><page Index="193"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 181  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Care and storage


                          Grease capacity:
                            6.0–8.0 cc (0.20–0.27 oz)
                        1800 cc engine models
                                1













                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple
                        1900 cc engine models







                                      1






                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple






















                                                                                             181]]></page><page Index="194"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 182  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Maintenance

                                   Maintenance                Removing and installing the engine
                                                              covers
                             WARNING
                                                              The engine cover of each engine is remov-
                        Be sure to turn off the engines when you  able.
                        perform maintenance  unless otherwise  To remove the engine cover:
                        specified. If you are not familiar with ma-  (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 106.)
                        chine servicing, this work should be done  (2) Remove the engine cover screws.
                        by a Yamaha Boat Dealer or other quali-  1800 cc engine models
                        fied mechanic.

                        Maintenance, replacement, or repair of  the
                        emission control devices and system may be
                        performed by any marine SI engine repair es-                       1
                        tablishment or individual. Warranty repair,
                        however, must be performed at an autho-
                        rized Yamaha Boat Dealer. A service manual
                        is available for purchase through a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer for owners  who have the me-
                        chanical skills, tools, and other equipment
                                                              1  Engine cover screw
                        necessary to perform maintenance not cov-
                        ered by this owner’s/operator’s manual.  1900 cc engine models

                        Owner’s/operator’s manual
                        It is advisable to always carry the own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual with  you whenever  1
                        you use the boat.
                        To protect these materials from water dam-
                        age, it would be a good idea to put them in a
                        waterproof bag. If  your owner’s/operator’s
                        manual is damaged, order a replacement
                        from a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        The service information included in this man-  1  Engine cover screw
                        ual is intended to provide you, the owner,
                        with the necessary information for complet-  (3) Lift up the engine cover and remove it.
                        ing  your own preventive  maintenance and
                        minor repairs.











                        182]]></page><page Index="195"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 183  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                             Maintenance

                        1800 cc engine models                 1900 cc engine models





                                                    1








                        1  Engine cover
                                                              (2) Install the engine cover screws.
                        1900 cc engine models                 (3) Close the engine hood.



                             1










                        1  Engine cover

                        To install the engine cover:
                        (1) Place the engine cover in its original po-
                            sition, and then push it down.
                        1800 cc engine models




















                                                                                             183]]></page><page Index="196"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 184  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Maintenance

                        Periodic maintenance chart
                        The periodic maintenance chart gives general guidelines for periodic maintenance. Have a
                        Yamaha dealer perform the checks in the following chart. However, maintenance may need
                        to be performed more frequently depending on your operating conditions. If you have any
                        questions, consult a Yamaha dealer.
                        This “√” mark indicates items to be checked and serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Fuel hoses, clamps,   Check for damage, and check con-
                         canister, and check   nections and tightening of clamps      √
                         valve
                                           Check cap for damage, and check
                         Fuel filler cap                                              √
                                           seal for cracks and deformation
                         Fuel tank         Check installation            √            √
                         Main switches and
                         engine shut-off   Check operation               √            √
                         switch
                                           Check state of charge and termi-
                         Batteries         nals, and check for broken battery         √
                                           straps
                         Battery leads     Check terminals                            √
                         Battery switches  Check operation               √            √
                         Multi-function display  Check lighting          √            √
                         Neutral switches
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   Check operation              √            √
                         252S)
                         Hatch interlock
                         switches (wet stor-  Check operation            √            √
                         age compartment)
                         Blowers           Check operation               √            √
                         Horn              Check operation               √            √
                         Navigation lights  Check lighting               √            √
                                           Clean filter, check hoses for dam-
                         Electric bilge pump  age, and check tightening of            √
                                           clamps
                         Other electrical com-  Check operation of shower, stereo,   √  √
                         ponents           and other components
                         Steering master   Check operation and tilting mecha-  √      √
                         ASSY              nism, and check for looseness




                        184]]></page><page Index="197"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 185  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation           10    hours   hours   hours
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                                           Check hydraulic fluid level, and
                         Steering system (hy-  check for dirt in fluid
                         draulic system)   Check for hydraulic fluid leakage,   √     √
                         (252SD)           and check parts for wear and dam-
                                           age
                                           Check operation from steering mas-
                         Steering system   ter ASSY to jet thrust nozzles, and   √    √
                         (252SD)           check for free play
                                           Check jet pumps for corrosion
                         Steering system   Check connections of connectors,
                         (electrical system)   and check for looseness   √            √
                         (252SD)
                         Steering cables   Check connections and exterior,            √
                         (except for 252SD)  and lubricate
                         Throttle/shift pad-  Check operation            √            √
                         dles (252SD)
                         Articulating keel (ex-  Check operation, and check link rod   √
                         cept for 252SD)   for bends and damage
                                           Check exterior and operation,
                         Remote control le-  check shift operation, and check for   √  √
                         vers
                                           looseness
                         Throttle cables   Check connections and exterior,
                         (AR250 / SX250 /   and lubricate                             √
                         252S)
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Shift cables                                                 √
                                           and lubricate (shift gate end)
                         Exhaust hoses, wa-  Check for exhaust leakage, and
                         ter locks, and resona-  check clamps at connections          √
                         tors
                         Drain passages    Remove clogs                               √
                         Drain plug        Check O-ring                  √            √
                         Hull and deck     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check installation and operation,
                         Windshield and seats                            √            √
                                           and check for damage
                         Wakeboard tower   Check installation, and check for
                         (except for SX250)   damage                     √            √
                         and bimini top
                         Hatches, hinges, and   Check installation       √            √
                         packing seals
                         Ladders (bow and   Check installation           √            √
                         stern)
                                                                                             185]]></page><page Index="198"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 186  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Access port caps  Check exterior and installation            √
                         Spark plugs       Check                         √            √
                         High-pressure fuel   Check connections and exterior,         √
                         hoses             and check for leakage
                         Engine oil        Replace                       √     √      √
                         Engine oil filters  Replace                                  √
                         Air filter elements  Check for damage and dirt               √
                         Intake hoses and   Check for damage, and check con-          √
                         breather hoses    nections
                         Throttle bodies   Lubricate throttle valves                  √
                         Anodes (engines)  Check for corrosion                              √ *2
                         Valve clearance   Check and adjust                                 √ *2
                         Rubber couplings  Check for looseness and noise                     √
                         Engine mounts     Check for damage and peeling                      √
                         Cooling water hoses   Check for damage, and check con-
                         and cooling water pi-  nections                                     √
                         lot outlet hoses
                         Water inlet strainers  Check for damage         √            √
                         Intake grates     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check for bends, damage, and for-
                         Impellers                                       √            √
                                           eign material
                         Impeller ducts    Check and lubricate                        √
                                           Check for damage and lubricate
                         Drive shaft spline                                                  √
                                           splines
                                           Check bearings and grease condi-
                         Jet pump bearings                                                   √
                                           tion
                         Jet thrust nozzles  Check movement, and lubricate            √
                         Intermediate hous-  Lubricate                                √
                         ings
                         Anodes (jet pump   Check for corrosion                       √
                         units)
                        *1: Whichever comes first.
                        *2: Check every 200 hours.
                        Perform the pre-operation checks and  post-operation checks  before  performing  periodic
                        maintenance.





                        186]]></page><page Index="199"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 187  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                            Specifications

                                       Specifications (1800 cc engine models)

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE
                                                             1179 kg (2600 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              AR250 / 252SE
                                                             2900 mm (114.0 in)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1900 mm (75.0 in)
                                                             252S
                                                             2770 mm (109.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR250
                                                             1846 kg (4070 lb)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1805 kg (3979 lb)
                                                             252S
                                                             1898 kg (4184 lb)
                                                             252SE
                                                             1911 kg (4213 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  43.8 L/h (11.6 US gal/h, 9.6 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     3.24 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1300 ±100 r/min
























                                                                                             187]]></page><page Index="200"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 188  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1812 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         14.7°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°


























                        188]]></page><page Index="201"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 189  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil





                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SJ or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse                        30 A
                         BCU fuse (252SE)                    50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A


















                                                                                             189]]></page><page Index="202"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 190  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Specifications

                                       Specifications (1900 cc engine models)

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             12 person
                         Maximum load capacity               AR250 / SX250 / 252S / 252SE / 252SD
                                                             1179 kg (2600 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              7470 mm (294.0 in)
                         Beam                                2580 mm (102.0 in)
                         Height                              AR250 / 252SE / 252SD
                                                             2900 mm (114.0 in)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1900mm (75.0 in)
                                                             252S
                                                             2770 mm (109.0 in)
                         Draft                               520 mm (20.5 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR250
                                                             1824 kg (4021 lb)
                                                             SX250
                                                             1783 kg (3931 lb)
                                                             252S
                                                             1876 kg (4136 lb)
                                                             252SE
                                                             1888 kg (4162 lb)
                                                             252SD
                                                             1971 kg (4345 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  59.6 L/h (15.7 US gal/h, 13.1 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     2.38 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1500 ±100 r/min





















                        190]]></page><page Index="203"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 191  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 1898 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       88.0 × 78.0 mm (3.46 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.2 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         16.1°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°


























                                                                                             191]]></page><page Index="204"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 192  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil





                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SG or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           4.3 L (4.55 US qt, 3.78 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  2.5 L (2.64 US qt, 2.20 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  2.6 L (2.75 US qt, 2.29 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse (AR250 / SX250 / 252S)  30 A
                         BCU fuse (252SE / 252SD)            50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse         20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory fuse                      20 A
                         Steering switch fuse (252SD)        3 A

















                        192]]></page><page Index="205"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 193  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                   Troubleshooting
                        If you have any trouble with your boat, use this section to check for the possible cause. If you
                        cannot find the cause or if the procedure for replacement or repair is not described in this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, ask your Yamaha Boat Dealer or a qualified mechanic for the proper
                        service.

                        Troubleshooting chart
                        The Troubleshooting  chart contains:  “TROUBLE,” “POSSIBLE  CAUSE,” “REMEDY,” and
                        “PAGE.”
                        Check the possible cause and remedy, and also the referred page for the maintenance steps
                        to solve the trouble.
                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor does not   switch (252SE /   place     switch                   39
                         turn over   252SD)
                                     Fuse          Burned out       Replace fuse and check wiring  201
                                     Battery       Run down         Recharge                178
                                                   Poor terminal con-  Tighten as required  178
                                                   nections
                                                   Battery switch off  Turn on switch        39
                                     Rear platform   Not latched    Latch securely          113
                                     hatch
                                     Starter compo-  Faulty         Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     nent                           Boat Dealer
                                     Remote control   Not in neutral posi-  Move remote control lever to   42
                                     lever         tion             neutral position
                                     Throttle/shift pad-  Squeezed  Release                  45
                                     dle (252SD)























                                                                                             193]]></page><page Index="206"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 194  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor turns   switch (AR250 /   place        switch                   39
                         over/engine   SX250 / 252S)
                         does not    Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  136
                         start
                                                   Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Crankcase     Filled with fuel  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Filled with water  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged or water   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   collected        Boat Dealer
                         Warning is   Over temperature  Jet intake clogged  Clean           196
                         displayed   warning*      Cooling system   Clean
                                                   clogged                                  155
                                     Oil pressure   Oil pressure dropped  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning*                       Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  136
                                     Checking engine   Faulty sensors  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning                        Boat Dealer
                         Engine runs   Fuel        Empty            Refill as soon as possible   136
                         irregularly or            Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         stalls                    ed               Boat Dealer              —
                                                   Incorrect octane   Use correct fuel      136
                                                   number
                                     Fuel filter   Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dirt present  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.






                        194]]></page><page Index="207"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 195  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Boat speed   Cavitation   Jet intake  clogged  Clean               196
                         too slow or   Engine overheat*  Jet intake clogged   Clean         196
                         loses power
                                                   Cooling system   Clean                   155
                                                   clogged
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged          Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









































                                                                                             195]]></page><page Index="208"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 196  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                             Emergency procedures
                        Jet pump clean-out procedure
                                                                            2
                             WARNING
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        nore any of the following:
                         Turn off and remove both main switch
                          keys, remove the clip from the engine
                          shut-off switch, and wait for all move-
                          ment to stop  before removing the  ac-                              1
                          cess port caps.
                                                              1  Strap eye
                         Never override the interlocks to run the  2  Retaining cord
                          engines with the rear platform hatch
                          open.                               (4) While holding the  handle and  pushing
                         The impellers have sharp  edges.  Be   down, turn the access port cap counter-
                          careful when reaching into jet pump ar-  clockwise until the “SET” mark is aligned
                          eas.                                   with the slot, and then lift the cap by the
                                                                 handle.
                        If weeds or debris get caught in the intakes or
                        impellers, cavitation can occur, and though  NOTICE
                        the engine speed rises, forward thrust will de-   Do not lift or pull the cap with the retain-
                        crease. If this condition is allowed to contin-  ing cord.
                        ue, jet pump damage can occur and the   Set the cap where it cannot be acciden-
                        engines may overheat and seize. If there is  tally knocked overboard.
                        any sign that a  jet intake or impeller is
                        clogged  with  weeds or debris, follow this
                        clean-out procedure.                            2
                        (1) Turn off and remove the main switch key,                      1
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                            switch, and  wait for all movement  to
                            stop.
                        (2) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            113.)
                        (3) Check that the retaining cord is securely
                            attached to the  access  port cap  and
                            strap eye.                        1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot A









                        196]]></page><page Index="209"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 197  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery



                                                                          2
                              1
                                                                      1
                                                                                           3









                        1  Access port cap                    1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot A
                        (5) Remove any weeds or debris from the  3  Slot B
                            drive shaft, impeller, pump housing, and
                            jet thrust nozzle. If you cannot remove  (8) Check that the cap is parallel to the cen-
                            the debris, consult a Yamaha Boat Deal-  terline of the boat. Pull the handle force-
                            er.                                  fully to make sure that the cap is locked
                        (6) To reinstall the access port  cap, first  securely. If a strong pull will move the ac-
                            clean off any sand or other foreign matter  cess port cap, it is not locked securely—
                            from the cap or port surfaces. Apply a  the cap could be forced out by water
                            light coat of Yamalube Waterproof Ma-  pressure during operation.
                            rine Grease (P/N: ACC-GREAS-10-CT), if             1
                            available, to the seal of the access port
                            cap. If grease is not available, apply the
                            grease  during  the  post-operation
                            checks.
                        (7) Insert the cap so that the “SET” mark is
                            aligned with the slot A, and then while
                            pushing the handle turn the cap clock-
                            wise until the “SET” mark is aligned with
                            the slot B.
                                                              1  Parallel to the centerline of the boat

                                                              (9) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Be sure the access port caps are locked
                                                              securely in place. Otherwise, the caps
                                                              could be forced out of the access ports by
                                                              water pressure,  causing loss of  perfor-
                                                              mance and possible damage.



                                                                                             197]]></page><page Index="210"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 198  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                        TIP:                                  (4) Open the cable clamps above the shift
                        The rear platform hatch has interlocks to shut  motor.
                        off the engines should the hatch be acciden-
                        tally opened during operation.  The engines                          1
                        will not restart unless the hatch is closed and
                        latched.

                        Raising the shift gates (252SE)
                        If the shift actuator malfunctions and the shift
                        gates remain in the lowered position, the boat
                        will not be able to move forward.
                        After raising the shift gates so that the boat
                        can move forward, immediately return to  1  Cable clamps
                        shore and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer ser-
                        vice the boat.                        (5) While pushing down the tip of the ball
                        To raise the shift gates:                joint, remove the shift cables  from  the
                        (1) Remove the lock  plate  from the emer-  shift motor.
                            gency engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Open  the lockable storage compart-
                            ment.(See page 110.)
                        (3) Grasp the shift motor cover at the loca-
                            tion shown in the figure, pull in the direc-
                            tion of the arrow to release the latch of                 1
                            the shift motor cover from the fitting on
                            the shift motor, and remove the shift mo-
                            tor cover.                         2

                                                     2
                                                              1  Ball joint
                                                              2  Shift cables






                         1
                              3
                        1  Shift motor cover
                        2  Latch
                        3  Shift motor





                        198]]></page><page Index="211"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 199  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        (6) Align the removed shift cables with the  Power steering system will not
                            grooves in the shift motor cover, and at-  operate (252SD)
                            tach them to the shift motor cover.  If the power steering system malfunctions, a
                                                              warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                                                              play and the direction of the boat cannot be
                                                              changed even if the steering wheel is turned.
                                                              Manually point the jet thrust nozzles in the
                                                              straight-ahead direction, and then use  the
                                                         1    difference in the amount of throttle for the
                                                              port and starboard engines to steer the boat
                                                              and return to shore. After returning to shore,
                                   1                          have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                                                              TIP:
                        1  Shift motor cover grooves          If  a malfunction  is  detected for the power
                                                              steering system, the maximum engine speed
                        (7) Place the shift motor cover in an open  will be limited to approximately 5000 rpm.
                            space.
                                                              To point the jet thrust nozzles in the straight-
                        TIP:                                  ahead direction:
                         In the preceding procedure, the shift gates  (1) Stop the engines  and remove the clip
                          cannot be placed in the neutral or reverse  from the engine shut-off switch.
                          positions.                          (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-
                         While the shift cables are attached to the  ment. (See page 110.)
                          shift motor cover, the boat will move for-  (3) Turn the service valves on the steering
                          ward even if the remote control levers are  pump in the direction shown in the illus-
                          moved to the reverse position.         tration.

                        If the shift gates cannot be raised using the
                        preceding procedure, the shift gates can be
                        raised manually from the water.
                        To raise the shift gates from the water:
                        (1) Follow the above steps 1-5 for “To raise
                            the shift gates”.
                        (2) Enter the water and move to the rear of
                            the marine jet.                            1
                        (3) Raise the shift gates to the forward posi-
                            tion.                             1  Service valve
                        (4) Attach the shift cables to the shift motor
                            cover.





                                                                                             199]]></page><page Index="212"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 200  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        (4) Move the cable  holder of the steering  Turning to starboard
                            cylinder manually  and align the end of
                            the rod with the edge of the bracket.

                                               1
                                                                                      F
                                                                                      N
                                                 2   3
                                                                                      R



                                                              TIP:
                                                              Because the port and starboard engines op-
                        1  Steering cylinder                  erate at the same engine speed when the sin-
                        2  Edge of the bracket                gle lever mode or DRiVE X mode is activated,
                        3  Cable holder                       the difference in the amount of throttle for the
                                                              engines cannot be used to steer the boat.
                        (5) Tighten the service valve.
                                                              Jump-starting
                        To change the steering direction of the boat:
                                                                  WARNING
                        Activate the running mode and use the differ-
                        ence in the amount of throttle for the port and  Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        starboard engines.                    nore any of the following:
                        Turning to port                        If the blowers will not operate, ventilate
                                                               the engine compartment by opening the
                                                               engine hood for several minutes before
                                                               attempting a jump-start.
                                                               Do not connect the negative (–) jumper
                                                F
                                                               cable to the negative (–) terminal of the
                                                N              dead  battery. Sparks  could ignite bat-
                                                               tery or fuel vapors, which could cause
                                                R
                                                               an explosion.
                                                              If the boat battery  runs  down, the engines
                                                              can be started in an emergency using a 12-
                                                              volt booster battery and jumper cables.
                                                              To connect the jumper cables:
                                                              (1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the
                                                                 dead battery to the positive (+) terminal
                                                                 of the booster battery with the positive
                                                                 (+) jumper cable.



                        200]]></page><page Index="213"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 201  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        (2) Connect one  end of the negative  (–)  Fuse replacement
                            jumper cable to the negative (–) terminal
                                                                  WARNING
                            of the booster battery.
                        (3) Connect the other end of the negative (–)  Do not use fuses  of a higher amperage
                            jumper cable to  an engine hanger.  than recommended. Substitution with  a
                            NOTICE: Be sure all connections are  fuse that has an improper rating can cause
                            secure and correct before attempting  extensive electrical system  damage and
                            to start the engines. Any wrong con-  possible fire.
                            nection may damage  the  electrical
                                                              If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                            system.
                                                              fuse.
                                                              To replace a fuse:
                                                              (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 106.)
                                                              (2) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                                                                 cover inward, pull the cover toward the
                                                                 bow and remove it.
                           1                       2          1800 cc engine models





                                     5   4    3                               1
                        1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                        2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                        3  Start battery
                        4  Booster battery
                        5  Engine hunger
                                                              1  Fuse box cover
                        (4) Start the engines, and then disconnect
                            the jumper cables by reversing the above
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                            steps. NOTICE: Do not turn the main
                            switch key or push the “START/STOP”
                            button for more than 5 seconds. If the
                            engine does not start in 5 seconds, re-
                            lease the main switch key or                      1
                            “START/STOP” button and try again
                            after 15 seconds. Continuous crank-
                            ing for more than 5 seconds will dis-
                            charge  the  battery and the engines
                            will not start. The starter motors may
                            also be damaged if they are engaged
                                                              1  Fuse box cover
                            continuously for more than 5 seconds.


                                                                                             201]]></page><page Index="214"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 202  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        AR250 / SX250 / 252S                  252SE (4-star model)
                                1 23 4           5 6             1 23       4  5       6 7



                                                                                            8
                                                                                            9


                                                                                            8
                                     8       7                            11      10
                        1  Electronic throttle valve fuse     1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                        2  Fuel pump fuse                     2  Fuel pump fuse
                        3  Main relay drive fuse              3  Main relay drive fuse
                        4  Main fuse                          4  Main fuse
                        5  Fuse puller                        5  Spare fuse
                        6  Battery fuse                       6  Fuse puller
                        7  Spare fuse                         7  Battery fuse
                        8  Unused fuse                        8  Screw
                                                              9  BCU fuse
                        252SE (3-star model) / 252SD          10 Spare fuse
                            1 23      4   5      6            11 Unused fuse
                                                              (3) 252SE  / 252SD: When replacing  the
                                                                 BCU fuse, remove the screws, and then
                                                       7
                                                                 remove the fuse. Install the spare fuse,
                                                       8         and then tighten the screws.
                                                              (4) When replacing an accessory fuse,  re-
                                                                 move the accessory fuse holder or cov-
                                                       7         er. (Open the rear underseat storage
                                             9                   compartment [port] to access the acces-
                                                                 sory fuse. [See page 109.])
                        1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                        2  Fuel pump fuse
                        3  Main relay drive fuse
                        4  Main fuse
                        5  Spare fuse
                        6  Fuse puller
                        7  Screw
                        8  BCU fuse
                        9  Spare fuse






                        202]]></page><page Index="215"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 203  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                                            2 3 4 5             Fuse amperage:
                                                                  Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Fuel pump fuse:
                                           10   9  8  7  6
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Main relay drive fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                1
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Battery fuse:
                        1  Accessory fuse cover
                                                                    30 A
                        2  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                           Switch Panel fuse                      BCU fuse:
                                                                    50 A
                        3  CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse
                        4  Horn fuse                              Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                        5  Bilge pump fuse                        Switch Panel fuse:
                        6  Power distribution module fuse           20 A
                        7  USB fuse                               CLH/CLG/Power Port/USB fuse:
                        8  Accessory 2 fuse                         20 A
                        9  Accessory 1 fuse                       Horn fuse:
                        10 Steering switch fuse (252SD)
                                                                    7.5 A
                                                                  Bilge pump fuse:
                        (5) Replace the blown fuse with the spare
                                                                    4 A
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using
                                                                  Power distribution module fuse:
                            the fuse puller.
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  USB fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Accessory 1 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Accessory 2 fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Steering switch fuse:
                                                                    3A
                                                              (6) Install the fuse box cover.
                                                              (7) If an accessory fuse was replaced, install
                                                                 the accessory fuse holder or cover.
                                                              (8) Close the engine hood.








                                                                                             203]]></page><page Index="216"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 204  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Running on one engine                 Towing the boat
                         NOTICE                                   WARNING

                        Do not operate the boat above a no-wake   The  operator of  the towing boat  must
                        speed with just one engine.            keep  speed to a minimum  and avoid
                        Severe engine damage could result be-  traffic or obstacles  which could be  a
                        cause water can flood the non-operating  hazard to either boat.
                        engine through the water intake.       The towing line should be long enough
                                                               so the towed boat will not collide with
                        If one engine becomes inoperative, the prop-
                                                               the towing boat when slowing down.
                        erly running engine can be used to return to
                        shore. Operate at a no-wake speed to pre-  The boat should be towed only if it becomes
                        vent water from flooding the non-operating  inoperative.
                        engine  through  the water intake. The no-  The towing rope should be long enough so
                        wake mode can be used for  this purpose.  that the boat will not collide with the towing
                        (See pages 54 and 79.)                boat when slowing  down. A good rule of
                                                              thumb is a tow rope which is three times the
                                                              combined length of the towing boat and the
                                                              boat.
                                                              Tow the boat using the bow eye only. Tow the
                                                              boat at a no-wake speed. NOTICE: Do not
                                                              tow the boat at speed fast enough to leave
                                                              a wake (8 km/h, 5 mph). Severe engine
                                                              damage could result because water can
                                                              flood the non-operating engines through
                                                              the water intakes.










                                                                   1



                                                              1  Bow eye









                        204]]></page><page Index="217"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 205  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                                   Limited warranty































































                                                                                             205]]></page><page Index="218"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 206  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Consumer information


































































                        206]]></page><page Index="219"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 207  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                       YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.)











                          Keep your Yamaha Boat protected even after   sonable expenses you incur because your
                          the 1-year warranty coverage provisions  Yamaha needs covered service: replace-
                          expire with genuine Yamaha Extended Service  ment vehicle rental, emergency towing,
                          (Y.E.S.).                             phone calls, even food and lodging when
                                                                you are away from home. This superb cov-
                          Y.E.S. is designed and administered by  erage goes into effect when you purchase
                          Yamaha Motor Corporation to provide maxi-  Y.E.S., so it applies to any warranty repairs
                          mum owner satisfaction.You get uninterrupted  as well as covered repairs during your entire
                          factory-backed coverage for extra peace of
                                                                Y.E.S. plan period.
                          mind.
                                                              • Y.E.S. coverage is honored at any autho-
                          • Y.E.S. is flexible. You choose the plan that’s   rized Yamaha dealer nationwide.
                           right for you: 12 months, 24 months, 36
                           months, or up to 48 months on certain mod-  • Y.E.S. coverage is transferable to a new
                           els   beyond the 1-year warranty coverage pe-  owner if you sell or trade-in. That can make
                           riod. That means you can get up to 5 years   your Yamaha Boat much more valuable!
                           of coverage on the power train, controls, and
                           other components to match the comforting   This excellent Y.E.S. plan coverage is only
                           5-year standard protection on the hull.  available to Yamaha owners like you, and only
                                                              while your Yamaha is still within the first year
                          • Y.E.S. is designed and administered by the   of the  Yamaha Limited  Warranty period. So
                           same Yamaha people who handle your war-  visit your authorized Yamaha dealer to get all
                           ranty–and it shows in the comprehensive  the facts. He can show you how easy it is to
                           coverage benefits. There are no limitations   protect your investment with Yamaha Extended
                           on hours of use. Coverage isn’t limited to   Service. We urge you to act now. You’ll get
                           “moving parts” or the “drive train” like many  the excellent benefits of TRIP coverage right
                           other plans. And Y.E.S. covers manufactur-  away, and you’ll rest easy knowing you’ll have
                           ing defects just like the warranty. See the   strong factory-backed protection even after
                           sample contract at your Yamaha dealer to   your Yamaha Limited  Warranty expires. See
                           see how comforting uninterrupted factory-  your dealer today!
                           backed protection can be.
                                                              A special note:
                          • You don’t have to pay anything for cov-
                           ered repairs. There’s no deductible to pay,  If visiting your dealer isn’t convenient, contact
                           and repairs aren’t “prorated.” You don’t have  Yamaha with your Primary ID number or Hull
                           any “out-of-pocket” expenses for covered  Identification Number. We’ll be happy to help
                           repairs.                           you get the Y.E.S. coverage you need.
                          • In addition,  Travel and Recreation      Yamaha Service Marketing
                           Interruption Protection (TRIP) is included  P.O. Box 6555
                           at no extra cost. TRIP gives you up to $250   Cypress, CA 90630
                           reimbursement per occurrence for any rea-  1-(866)-YES-EXTD
                                                                     (1-866-937-3983)





                                                                                             207]]></page><page Index="220"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 208  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Consumer information

                                                   Sample float plan
                        Leave a float plan with a responsible person on shore before boating. The example below can
                        be copied and used.


                                                     FLOAT PLAN
                                                   VESSEL INFORMATION
                           BOAT MAKE:      Yamaha              MOTOR TYPE:  Jet
                           MODEL:
                           LENGTH:                             REGISTRATION NO:
                           DECK COLOR:                         HULL COLOR:
                                                       PASSENGER
                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #2:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #3:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #4:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                                                  DEPARTURE INFORMATION
                           POINT OF DEPARTURE:                 DATE/TIME:
                           TOW VEHICLE            LICENSE:     TRAILER LICENSE:
                           MAKE / MODEL
                                                 DESTINATION INFORMATION
                           DESTINATION:       LORAN OR GPS COORDINATES:   INTENDED ACTIVITY:




                           EXPECTED RETURN    DATE:                       TIME:
                           LOCAL U.S. COAST GUARD PHONE #:
                           NOTES:               HULL COLOR:

                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:




                        208]]></page><page Index="221"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 209  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        A                                     Boarding from a dock or landing jetty.... 165
                        Access port cap check .......................... 148  Boarding from the bow .......................... 165
                        Accessory outlet .................................... 124  Boarding from the water ........................ 164
                        Additional equipment                  Boat characteristics ................................. 18
                          recommendations................................. 17  Boat control functions.............................. 39
                        Anchor light (252S / 252SE / 252SD)..... 116  Boating with passengers........................ 163
                        Anchor light (AR250) .............................. 116  Bow ladder............................................. 119
                        Anchor light (SX250) .............................. 117
                        Anchor storage compartment................ 107  C
                        Anchoring............................................... 167  Check engine warning...................... 73, 100
                        Approval labels of emission control   Cleaning the boat................................... 175
                          certificate................................................ 2  Communication error warning.......... 74, 101
                                                              Controller ...........................................53, 78
                        B                                     Cooling water pilot outlet check ............ 155
                        Backing your trailer................................ 171  Crossing wakes and swells.................... 167
                        Basic stain guide.................................... 177  Cruise assist....................................... 53, 78
                        Batteries and battery switches ................ 39  Cruising limitations................................... 14
                        Battery care............................................ 178
                        Battery check......................................... 150  D
                        Beaching................................................ 166  Depth warning.................................. 74, 101
                        Bilge pump............................................. 141  Docking.................................................. 165
                        “BILGE” switch .................................. 51, 76  Drain plug check ....................................150
                        Bilge water check................................... 150  Drive control screen ................................. 90
                        Bilge water, draining .............................. 140  DRiVE X mode (252SD)............................ 84
                        Bilge water, draining on land ................. 140  Driver’s seat ........................................... 103
                        Bilge water, draining on water ............... 141  Driver’s side console compartment ....... 110
                        Bimini top (252SE / 252SD) ................... 132  Driving your boat....................................157
                        Bimini top (AR250 / 252S)...................... 128  E
                        Bimini top, installing (252SE / 252SD) ... 132  Emergency procedures.......................... 196
                        Bimini top, installing (AR250 / 252S)...... 131  Emission control information ..................... 2
                        Bimini top, installing (SX250) ................. 135  Enclosed head compartment................. 109
                        Bimini top, removing (252SE / 252SD)... 132  Engine break-in ...................................... 143
                        Bimini top, removing (AR250 / 252S)..... 131  Engine covers, removing and
                        Bimini top, removing (SX250)................. 135  installing.............................................. 182
                        Bimini top, setting up (AR250 / 252S).... 128  Engine hood ........................................... 106
                        Bimini top, setting up (SX250)................ 133  Engine oil................................................ 137
                        Bimini top, storing (AR250 / 252S)......... 130  Engine oil, checking ............................... 138
                        Bimini top, storing in the fully collapsed   Engine oil level check............................. 149
                          position (SX250).................................. 134  Engine oil requirement ........................... 137
                        Bimini top, storing in the upright    Engine serial numbers................................ 1
                          position (SX250).................................. 134  Engine shut-off cords (lanyards)
                        Bimini top (SX250).................................. 133  check .................................................. 154
                        Bimini top, trailering (AR250 / 252S)...... 131  Engine shut-off switch ............................. 39
                        Bimini top, trailering (SX250).................. 135  Engine shut-off switch check................. 155
                        Blower checks........................................ 151  Enjoy your boat responsibly.....................26
                        “BLOWER” switch.................................... 76

                                                                                             209]]></page><page Index="222"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 210  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                        Index

                        F                                     Labels, other ............................................12
                        Fire extinguisher check.......................... 147  Labels, warning.......................................... 8
                        Fire extinguisher, operating ................... 147  Launching...............................................172
                        Fire extinguisher, storing........................ 147  Learning to operate your boat................ 157
                        Float mode............................................... 84  Leaving a dock....................................... 161
                        Flushing the cooling system .................. 174  Lifting .....................................................173
                        Front underseat storage               Limitations on who may operate the
                          compartments .................................... 107  boat.......................................................13
                        Front walk-through................................. 115  Limited warranty ....................................205
                        Fuel ........................................................ 136  Loading .................................................. 172
                        Fuel level check ..................................... 156  Long-term storage ................................. 179
                        Fuel requirement .................................... 136  Low fuel level warning...................... 74, 101
                        Fuel system checks ............................... 149  Low oil pressure warning ................. 73, 100
                        Fuel system, long-term storage ............. 179  Low voltage warning ..............................101
                        Fuse replacement .................................. 201  Lubrication ............................................. 179
                        G                                     M
                        Galley storage compartment            Main components, location...................... 28
                          (except for AR250 / SX250) ................ 112  Main switch (252SE / 252SD)................... 41
                        Getting to know your boat ..................... 157  Main switches (AR250 / SX250 / 252S) ... 41
                        Glossary, boat.......................................... 27  Maintenance........................................... 182
                        Glove compartment ............................... 112  Manufactured date labels .......................... 4
                        Grease points......................................... 179  Map screen ........................................ 60, 85
                                                              Media screen......................................65, 91
                        H                                     Multi-function display elements......... 56, 81
                        Hazard information................................... 17  Multi-function display unit
                        Helm controls (AR250 / SX250) ............... 50  operation......................................... 51, 77
                        Helm controls (except for AR250 /
                          SX250) .................................................. 75  N
                        High voltage warning ............................. 101  “NAV LIGHTS” switch .............................. 76
                        Hitch....................................................... 170  Night operation ........................................ 19
                        Home screen...................................... 60, 85  No-wake mode................................... 54, 79
                        Horn check............................................. 153
                        “HORN” switch .................................. 51, 76  O
                        Hull Identification Number (HIN) ................ 1  Operation mode ....................................... 84
                                                              Operational requirements ........................ 15
                        I                                     Over temperature warning ............... 73, 100
                        Identification number records.................... 1  Owner’s/operator’s manual.................... 182

                        J                                     P
                        Jet intake checks ................................... 148  Passenger’s seat....................................104
                        Jet pump, cleaning ................................ 196  Periodic maintenance chart ...................184
                        Joystick, using ......................................... 51  Post-launch checks ............................... 154
                        Jump-starting......................................... 200  Post-operation care ............................... 174
                                                              Post-operation checks........................... 168
                        L                                     Power steering system will not operate
                        Labels, important ....................................... 6  (252SD) ...............................................199

                        210]]></page><page Index="223"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 211  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        Pre-launch checks ................................. 145  Swim platform seat (252S / 252SE /
                        Pre-operation check points ................... 145  252SD) ................................................ 105
                        Pre-operation checklist.......................... 144  Swim platform shower (252S / 252SE /
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number ...... 1  252SD) ................................................ 121
                                                              Switch panel (252S / 252SE / 252SD)...... 76
                        R                                     Switch panel (AR250 / SX250) ................. 51
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    System control screen ....................... 68, 94
                          (port) ................................................... 109
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    T
                          (starboard) .......................................... 108  Tilt lever.................................................... 45
                        Rear walk-through ................................. 115  To get more boating safety information... 26
                        Remote control keypad.......................... 123  Towing the boat ..................................... 204
                        Remote control lever checks ................. 145  Trailering checklist ................................. 170
                        Remote control levers.............................. 42  Trailering the boat .................................. 170
                        Required equipment ................................ 16  Trip screen ......................................... 64, 89
                        Reverse RPM control......................... 54, 80  Troubleshooting ..................................... 193
                        Rules of the road...................................... 20  Troubleshooting chart............................ 193
                        Running mode.......................................... 84  Turning the boat..................................... 162
                        Running on one engine.......................... 204
                                                              U
                        S                                     Underwater seats (252S / 252SE /
                        Sample float plan ................................... 208  252SD) ................................................ 105
                        Screen tab bar ......................................... 82  USB chargers......................................... 124
                        Seating locations ..................................... 25
                        Seats...................................................... 102  W
                        Setting screen.................................... 69, 95  Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                        Side table ............................................... 123  setting up (252SE / 252SD) ................ 127
                        Single lever mode .................................... 84  Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                        Ski locker ............................................... 108  setting up (AR250 / 252S)...................126
                        Specifications                        Wakeboard tower (except for SX250) .... 125
                          (1800 cc engine models)..................... 187  Wakeboarding and water-skiing .............. 19
                        Specifications                        Walk-through ......................................... 115
                          (1900 cc engine models)..................... 190  Warnings .................................................. 99
                        Star labels (4-star models) ......................... 4  Wet storage compartment ..................... 113
                        Starting the engines............................... 157  Windshield.............................................. 115
                        “START/STOP” buttons                  Wireless charger ....................................125
                          (252SE / 252SD) ................................... 41  Y
                        Status indicator bar.................................. 83  YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                        Steering.................................................... 44  (Y.E.S.) ................................................ 207
                        Steering system checks......................... 145
                        Stern ladder ........................................... 120
                        Stern storage compartments ................. 114
                        Stopping the boat .................................. 164
                        Stopping the engines............................. 161
                        Storage compartments .......................... 107
                        Stowable table ....................................... 111
                        Swim platform........................................ 120
                                                                                             211]]></page><page Index="224"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 212  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM]]></page><page Index="225"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7F11.book  Page 1  Friday, May 16, 2025  5:14 PM










                        For your best ownership experience, think Genuine Yamaha!

                        Genuine Yamaha Parts – Genuine Yamaha replacement parts are the exact same
                        parts as the ones originally equipped on your vehicle, providing you with the
                        performance and durability you have come to expect. Why settle for aftermarket parts
                        that may not provide full confidence and satisfaction?

                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories – Yamaha only offers accessories that meet our
                        high standards for quality and performance. Buy with confidence, knowing your
                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories will fit right and perform right – right out of the box.

                        Yamalube – Take care of your Yamaha with legendary Yamalube oils, lubricants,
                        and care products. They’re formulated and approved by the toughest judges we
                        know: the Yamaha engineering teams that know your Yamaha from the inside out.

                        Genuine Yamaha Service Manuals – Get the same factory manual for your vehicle
                        that the technicians at your authorized Yamaha dealer use. Service manuals are
                        available through your Yamaha dealer or you can order them directly through
                        yamahapubs.com.

                        Genuine Yamaha products are available only from your Yamaha dealer.

                        Find out more at yamaha-motor.com]]></page><page Index="226"><![CDATA[Printed in USA
                        June 2025–0.3 × 1 CR




                                                                                            DIC183]]></page></pages></Search>